2018 Chrysler 300 User`s Guide

Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to
take following an accident, or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler
brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride.
To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).
www.chrysler.com/en/owners (U.S.) provides special offers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries, personalized service records and
more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often.
Download a FREE electronic copy of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, media and warranty booklet by visiting:
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S. residents);
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).
Chrysler.com (U.S.)
Chrysler.ca (Canada)
18LX-926 -AA • 300
FOURTH E DITION • U SER GU IDE
Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and
the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on
the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the
instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
CHRYSLER 300
2018 USER GUIDE
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
3242132_18d_Chrysler_300_UG_020518.indd 1
2/5/18 2:18 PM
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in
a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that
may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation
or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous
and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving.
It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly acquainted with your new Chrysler brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for
common questions. However, it is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions, maintenance procedures and important safety messages, please consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect manuals found on the website on the back cover and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Chrysler brand dealer.
D R I V I N G A N D A L C O H O L : Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired
I M P O R T A N T: Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and
follow the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend,
or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have
been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
3242132_18d_Chrysler_300_UG_020518.indd 2
2/5/18 2:18 PM
ALWAYS drive safely and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all
risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
This guide illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or
optional on this vehicle. This guide may also include
a description of features and equipment that are no
longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment described in this guide that are not available on this
vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make
changes in design and specifications and/or make
additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install
them on products previously manufactured.
This User Guide has been prepared to help you
quickly become acquainted with the important features of your vehicle. It contains most things you will
need to operate and maintain the vehicle, including
emergency information.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has
factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR®
parts, and cares about your satisfaction.
HOW TO FIND YOUR
OWNER’S MANUAL
ONLINE
This publication has been prepared as a reference
item to help you quickly become acquainted with
the most important features and processes of your
vehicle. It contains most things you will need to
operate and maintain the vehicle, including emergency information and procedures.
For more detailed descriptions of the topics discussed in this User Guide, as well as information
covering features and processes not covered in this
User Guide, the full vehicle Owner’s Manual can be
accessed for free online in a printer-friendly PDF
format.
To get the full Owner’s Manual or applicable
supplement for your vehicle, follow the appropriate web address below:
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html
(U.S. Residents)
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)
FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our environment and natural resources. By converting from
paper to electronic delivery for the majority of the
user information for your vehicle, together we
greatly reduce the demand for tree-based products
and lessen the stress on our environment.
This User Guide is not a replacement for the full
Owner’s Manual, and does not fully cover every
operation and procedure possible with your vehicle.
1
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO USE THIS
MANUAL
Essential Information
Each time direction instructions (left/right or
forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are given,
these must be intended as regarding an occupant in
the driver's seat. Special cases not complying with
this rule will be properly specified in the text.
The figures in this User Guide are provided by way
of example only: this might imply that some details
of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle.
2
In addition, the User Guide has been conceived
considering vehicles with the steering wheel on the
left side; it is therefore possible that in vehicles with
the steering wheel on the right side, the position or
construction of some controls is not exactly mirrorlike with respect to the figure.
To identify the chapter with the information needed
you can consult the index at the end of this User
Guide.
Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated
graphic tabs, at the side of each odd page. A few
pages further there is a key for getting to know the
chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs.
There is always a textual indication of the current
chapter at the side of each even page.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels
whose symbols indicate precautions to be observed
when using this component.
WARNINGS AND
CAUTIONS
While reading this User Guide you will find a series
of WARNINGS to be followed to prevent incorrect
use of components which could cause accidents or
injuries.
There are also CAUTIONS that must be followed
to prevent against procedures that could result in
damage to your vehicle.
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SAFETY
STARTING AND OPERATING
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
4
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . .6
INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
5
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Headlight Switch
2 — Multifunction Lever (Behind Steering Wheel)
3 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
4 — Instrument Cluster
5 — Speed Controls
6
6 — Ignition
7 — Switch Panel
8 — Uconnect System
9 — Climate Controls
INTERIOR
Interior
1 — Door Locks
2 — Door Handles
3 — Window Switches
4 — Parking Brake
5 — Seats
6 — Gear Selector
7 — Storage Compartment
8 — Glove Compartment
7
8
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats . . . . .25
Rear Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Front Head Restraint Removal . . . . . . . . . .26
IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . .14
STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . .14
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . .27
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . .27
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped . . . . .28
KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED . . .15
How To Use Remote Start — If Equipped . . . .15
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry. . . . . . .17
SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped .
Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . .
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.20
.22
.23
.24
MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped .28
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .29
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped. . . .29
EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) . . . . . . . . .30
High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . .30
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Automatic Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity Discharge
Headlights — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights On With Wipers . . . .
Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . .
Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . .
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.31
.31
.31
.32
.32
.32
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND
WASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Rain Sensing Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . .34
Automatic Climate Control Overview . .
Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . .34
. . .37
. . .38
. . .38
COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH
POWER SHADE — IF EQUIPPED . . .40
Opening Sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Closing Sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Power Shade . . .
Closing Power Shade . . . .
Venting Sunroof — Express.
Pinch Protect Feature . . .
Sunroof Maintenance. . . .
Ignition Off Operation . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.41
.41
.42
.42
.42
.42
HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
To Open The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
To Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
TRUNK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Trunk Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
10
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .44
Erasing All The HomeLink Channels . . . . . .44
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code
Or Non-Rolling Code Device . . . . . . . . . .44
Programming HomeLink To A Garage Door
Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Programming HomeLink To A Miscellaneous
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button . .46
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . .47
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
VEHICLE USER GUIDE —
IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information right through
your Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen system
— If Equipped.
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your Uconnect
Touchscreen: Press the Uconnect Apps button.
From there, press the Vehicle User Guide icon on
your touchscreen. No Uconnect registration is required.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display
Vehicle User Guide Touchscreen Icon
NOTE:
Vehicle User Guide features are not available while
the vehicle is moving. If you try to access while the
vehicle is in motion, the system will display: Feature
not available while the vehicle is in motion.
Features/Benefits
Pre-Installed Features
• Add selected topics to a fast-access Favorites
category
•
Your User Guide — •
Updated in real-time
Touchscreen
•
convenience
Available when and
where you need it
Customizable
interface
•
Maintenance sched- •
ules and information
Multilingual
•
Comprehensive icon
& symbol glossary
•
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you will
be able to explore your warranty information and
radio manual when and where you need them. Your
Uconnect system displays the Vehicle User Guide
on your touchscreen radio to assist in better understanding your vehicle. There’s no app to download,
no phone to connect and no external device needed
for playback. Plus, it’s updated throughout the year,
in real-time, so it never goes out of date.
• Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen radio
• Enhanced search and browsing capability
• Robust NAV application — If Equipped
• Icon and symbol glossary
• Warranty information
• Crucial driver information and assistance:
•
•
•
Operating
Instructions
Warranty
Information
•
Fluid Level
Standards
•
•
Maintenance
Schedules
Emergency
Procedures
911 Contact
and More
Tip: When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add
it to your Favorites, for easy access in the future.
11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical
release button on the back of the key fob sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
KEYS
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The
ignition system consists of a key fob with Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/STOP push
button ignition system. The Remote Keyless Entry
system consists of a key fob and Keyless EnterN-Go feature if equipped.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors
and trunk from distances up to approximately
66 feet (20 m) using a handheld key fob. The key
fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.
NOTE:
In the ON/RUN position, key fob commands are
disabled if the vehicle is at or above 5 MPH.
12
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
dead battery. In this situation, a backup method can
be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose
side of the key fob (side opposite of the Emergency
Key) against the ENGINE START/STOP button
and push to operate the ignition switch.
Key Fob
1 — Trunk Open
2 — Unlock
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — Panic Button
6 — Emergency Key
The key fob also contains an emergency key, which
is stored in the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go
dead. The emergency key is also for locking/
unlocking the glove compartment. You can keep
the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver's door or twice within five
seconds to unlock all doors.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the
unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also
be activated.
NOTE:
All door unlock settings can be programmed to
your convenience through Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
• Unlock the driver door on the first push of the key
fob unlock button.
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for
further information.
• Unlock all doors on the first push of the key fob
unlock button.
NOTE:
To unlock doors and trunk with passive entry, Refer
to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in
“Doors” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
NOTE:
When you use the key fob to open any door, the
courtesy lights, overhead lights, and approach lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped) will turn on.
Refer to “Interior Lights” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” in the Owner’s Manual for further information
This feature lets you program the system to unlock
either the driver's door or all doors on the first push
of the unlock button on the key fob.
To Lock The Doors And Trunk
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to
lock all doors.
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will
chirp to acknowledge the signal if programmed.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the
Owner’s Manual for further programmable information.
NOTE:
To lock the doors with passive entry, Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in
“Doors” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
If one or more doors are open, or the trunk is open,
the doors will lock. The doors will unlock automatically if the key is left inside the passenger compartment, otherwise the doors will stay locked.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
13
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ON/RUN
IGNITION SWITCH
• Driving position.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
• All the electrical devices are available.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in
the passenger compartment.
START
• The engine will start.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating positions, three of which are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. The three positions are
OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is
START. During start, ON/RUN will illuminate.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be
used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose
side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
key fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button
and push to operate the ignition switch.
WARNING!
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the following modes:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking,
alarm, etc.) are still available.
ACC
• Engine is not started.
• Some electrical devices are available.
14
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons.
A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
Refer to "Starting The Engine," in "Starting And
Operating" in the Owner’s Manual for further information.
REMOTE START —
IF EQUIPPED
How To Use Remote Start —
If Equipped
Push remote start button on the key fob twice within
five seconds. Pushing the remote start button a
third time shuts the engine off.
• PANIC button not pushed
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and
push the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
NOTE:
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
• With remote start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN position.
• Vehicle Security Alarm is not signaling an intrusion
• The vehicle must be started with the key after two
consecutive timeouts.
All of the following conditions must be met before
the engine will remote start:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Trunk closed
• Hazard switch off
• System not disabled from previous remote start
event
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start System, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• Check engine light shall not be present
15
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY
ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the keyless push
button ignition for unauthorized operation. While
the vehicle security alarm is armed, interior switches
for door locks and trunk release are disabled. If
16
something triggers the alarm, the vehicle security
alarm will provide the following audible and visible
signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or
turn signals will flash, and the vehicle security light in
the instrument cluster will flash.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the
OFF mode. Refer to "Ignition Switch" in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” in the Owner’s
Manual for further information.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
• Push lock on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger door
open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same exterior zone (refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry," located in
“Doors” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle"
for further information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
NOTE:
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock
the doors using the manual door lock plunger.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using
any of the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle, if
equipped. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry,” located in “Doors” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go ignition button (requires at least one valid key fob in the vehicle).
NOTE:
• The driver's door key cylinder and the trunk button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock
the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of
the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle security alarm will arm regardless
of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you
remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will
sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security
alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm
will remain armed when the battery is reconnected;
the exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If
this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
DOORS
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without
having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed on or off. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle,
the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a
slower response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will
re-lock and arm the security alarm (if equipped).
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
vehicle passive entry system if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless
signal and prevent the passive entry handle from
locking/unlocking the vehicle.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the driver's door handle, grab the front driver
door handle to unlock the driver's door automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise
when the door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. For further information regarding selecting “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for
further information.
17
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise
when the door is unlocked.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger door
handle is grabbed, regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive
Entry Key Fob In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic
door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive
entry. There are three situations that trigger a
FOBIK-Safe search in any passive entry vehicle.
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry
key fob while a door is open.
18
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open
doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob inside the
car and it does not find any Passive Entry key fobs
outside the car, then the car will unlock and alert the
customer.
To Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the deck lid, push the button on the right side of
CHMSL (Center High Mounted Stop Light), which
is located on the deck lid.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle,
and no valid Passive Entry key fob is detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the
doors when any of the following conditions are true:
• The doors are locked manually using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using
the door panel switch and then close the doors.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
NOTE:
If you inadvertently leave your vehicle's Passive
Entry key fob in the trunk and try to close the deck
lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs is
outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
deck lid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the
key fob lock button or the lock button located on
the vehicle’s interior door panel.
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front
door handles, push the door handle lock button to
lock all four doors.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When
Locking
NOTE:
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
• After pushing the door handle button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the
doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked
by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle
reacting and unlocking.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
key fob battery is dead.
19
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System
of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to store up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall through a
memory switch. Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, and power tilt and telescopic steering column
20
(if equipped) and a set of desired radio station
presets. Your key fob can also be programmed to
recall the same positions when the unlock button is
pushed.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt and
telescopic steering column [if equipped], and
radio station presets).
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, one key
fob can be linked to memory position 1 and the
other key fob can be linked to memory position 2.
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s
door trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
• The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
• The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall
either of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of
the memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument
cluster display will display which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
Programming The Memory Feature
• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory” in this section.
NOTE:
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of
two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing
the unlock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must select
the “Memory Linked To Fob” feature through the
Uconnect system screen.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in
your Owner’s Manual for further information.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2.
NOTE:
If a memory profile has not already been set,
refer to "Programming The Memory Feature"
in this section for instructions on how to set a
memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
release the set (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release button (1)
or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2)
will display in the instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be unlinked to your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, and within
10 seconds, followed by pushing the unlock button
on the key fob.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is
not in PARK, a message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
Driver One Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using
the memory switch, push memory button (1) on
the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using
the key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob
linked to memory position 1.
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
• To recall the memory setting for driver two using
the memory switch, push memory button (2) on
the memory switch.
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using
the key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob
linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
memory buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or by
pushing any of the seat adjustment switches. When
a recall is canceled, the driver's seat and steering
column (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering
and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when you
cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
• When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is
greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its
previously set position when you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
21
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when
the driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch
(22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the driver by moving the
seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated
Easy Entry and Easy Exit position.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the
vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled)
through the programmable features in the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for further
details.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions
and seat backs.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol
22
• Press the heated seat button
turn the LO setting on.
WARNING!
use, exhaustion or other physical condition
must exercise care when using the seat heater.
It may cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
• Press the heated seat button
turn the heating elements off.
a second time to
a third time to
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn off
automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are located
within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings.
The indicator arrows in touchscreen buttons indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator arrows
will illuminate for HI, and one for LO. Turning the
heating elements off will return the user to the radio
screen.
• Press the heated seat button
HI setting on.
once to turn the
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for further
details.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol
use, exhaustion or other physical condition
must exercise care when using the seat heater.
It may cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the two rear outboard seats may
be equipped with heated seats. There are two
heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers
to operate the seats independently. The heated seat
switches for each heater are located on the rear of
the center console.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the
level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for OFF.
• Press the heated seat button
HI setting on.
once to turn the
• Press the heated seat button
turn the LO setting on.
a second time to
• Press the heated seat button
turn the heating elements off.
a third time to
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four
minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will
drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is
selected, the system will automatically switch to
LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of indicator lights changes from two to one, indicating the
change. The LO-level setting will turn off automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, dia-
WARNING!
betes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol
use, exhaustion or other physical condition
must exercise care when using the seat heater.
It may cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with ventilated seats, the
seat cushion and seat back will have fans that draw
the air from the passenger compartment and move
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to
help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in
higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at
two speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located within the Uconnect system. You can gain
access to the control buttons through the climate
screen or the controls screen.
23
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
once to
• Press the ventilated seat button
choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
to choose LO.
a second time
• Press the ventilated seat button
turn the ventilated seat off.
a third time to
NOTE:
These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programmed to come on
during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” in your Owner's Manual for further
information.
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage area. To fold the rear
seatback, pull on the loops located on the upper
seatback.
24
Rear Seat Loop
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left
folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply opening the seats to the open
position, over time the seat cushion will return to its
normal shape.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position,
make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top
of the seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked
into position. If the seatback is not securely
locked into position, the seat will not provide
the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could
cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with
the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded
down position) should not be used as a play
area by children when the vehicle is in motion.
They could be seriously injured in a collision.
Children should be seated and using the
proper restraint system.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
injury by restricting head movement in the event of
a rear-impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so
that the top of the head restraint is located above
the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted or
removed could cause serious injury or death in
the event of a collision.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not
return to their normal position, see your authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located at the base of the head
restraint and push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear
of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to
gain additional clearance to the back of your head.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front
Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped
with Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event
of a rear impact, the RHRs will automatically extend
forward minimizing the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the RHR.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in
a location outside the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled
in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions
above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers
or portable DVD players. These items may
interfere with the operation of the Reactive
Head Restraint in the event of a collision and
could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
Adjustment Button
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
The center head restraint has two adjustable positions: up or down. When the center seat is being
occupied, the head restraint should be in the raised
position. When there are no occupants in the center
seat, the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
25
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located at the base of the head
restraint and push downward on the head restraint.
WARNING!
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the re-installation instructions above
prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat.
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in
a location outside the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled
in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions
above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Front Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as it
can go. Then, push the adjustment button and the
release button at the base of each post while pulling
the head restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint,
put the head restraint posts into the holes. Then,
adjust it to the appropriate height.
Adjustment Button
NOTE:
• The head restraint should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If
the center rear head restraints requires removal,
see your authorized dealer.
• The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.
26
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to
the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of the head.
STEERING WHEEL
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering
Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping
lever is located below the steering wheel at the end
of the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen
or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock
the steering column in position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering
Column
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/
telescoping steering column switch is located below
the multifunction lever on the steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Control
To tilt the steering column, move the switch up or
down as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the switch toward you or push the
switch away from you as desired.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your remote keyless entry key fob or the
memory switch on the driver's door trim panel to
return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in this section.
27
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• Press the heated steering wheel button
second time to turn the heating element off.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element that
helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated
steering wheel has only one temperature setting.
Once the heated steering wheel has been turned
on, it will stay on for an average of 80 minutes or
more before automatically shutting off. This time
will vary based on environmental temperatures. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not
turn on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to
the control button through the climate screen or the
controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
to turn the heating element on.
28
once
a
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come
on during a remote start through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion, or other physical conditions must
exercise care when using the steering wheel
heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater
to overheat.
MIRRORS
Power Folding Outside Mirrors —
If Equipped
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be
electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the
drive position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R
(right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will
fold in, pushing the switch a second time will return
the mirrors to the normal driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically
cycled, a potential extra button push is required to
get the mirrors back to the drive position. If the
mirror does not electrically fold, check for ice or dirt
build up at the pivot area which can cause excessive
drag.
Automatic Folding Mirrors
When the Automatic Folding Mirrors feature is
enabled, the exterior mirrors will fold in when exiting
the vehicle (the ignition is OFF, all doors are closed,
and the doors are locked).
• If the exterior mirrors were auto-folded, they will
unfold when the ignition is turned ON.
• If the exterior mirrors were manually folded, they
will not automatically unfold.
NOTE:
The Automatic Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory. The
Automatic Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect System. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in "Multimedia" in your
Owner’s Manual for further information.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if
the following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors, fold and unfold
them by pushing the button (this may require multiple button pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate Controls” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle”
for further information.
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument
panel lights, interior lights and fog lights.
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse —
If Equipped
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s
view of the ground rearward of the front doors. The
outside mirrors will move slightly downward from
the present position when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE. The outside mirrors will then return to
the original position when the vehicle is shifted out
of the REVERSE position. Each stored memory
setting will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors In
Reverse position.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt
Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for further information.
Light Control Switches
1 — Auto Headlight Position
2 — Push For Fog Lights
3 — Rotate Headlight Switch
4 — Rotate Instrument Panel Dimmer
5 — Rotate Ambient Light Dimmer
29
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light
and instrument panel light operation. Rotate the
headlight switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on
when the engine starts, headlights are off, and the
parking brake is off. The headlights must be used
for normal nighttime driving.
NOTE:
If allowed, by law, in the country in which the vehicle
was purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in "Multimedia" in your
Owner’s Manual for further information.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to
switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights
back to low beam.
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
To Activate
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by
automating high beam control through the use of a
digital camera mounted to the windshield. This
camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until
the approaching vehicle is out of view.
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position.
NOTE:
NOTE:
This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or
above 15 mph (24 km/h).
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off by selecting “ON” under
“Auto High Beam” within your Uconnect settings,
as well as turning the headlight switch to the
AUTO position. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for further
information.
To Deactivate
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause
headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on
the windshield or camera lens will cause the system
to function improperly.
Flash-To-Pass
If the windshield is replaced, the camera must be
re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See your
local authorized dealer.
30
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward front of vehicle) to engage the high beam
mode.
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward in vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the system.
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward
you. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on, and remain on, until the lever is released.
Automatic Headlights
NOTE:
This system automatically turns the headlights on or
off according to ambient light levels. To turn the
system on, rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the AUTO position. When the system
is on, the headlight time delay feature is also on.
This means the headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds after you place the ignition into the
OFF position. The headlight time delay can be
programmed 0/30/60/90 seconds.
• Each time the Adaptive Headlight System is
turned on, the headlights will initialize by performing a brief sequence of rotations.
• The Adaptive Headlight System is active only
when the vehicle is moving forward.
The Adaptive Headlight System can be turned on
or off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s
Manual for further information.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in
your Owner’s Manual for further information.
Parking Lights
To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
Turn the headlight switch knob to the first detent to
turn the parking lights on. This also turns on all
instrument panel lighting.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Adaptive Bi-Xenon High Intensity
Discharge Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically swivels the headlight
beam pattern horizontally to provide increased illumination in the direction the vehicle is steering.
Headlights On With Wipers
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn
on after the wipers are turned on if the headlight
switch is placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature is set to on. In addition, the
headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE:
The “Headlights On With Wipers” feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your
Owner’s Manual for further information.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when
leaving your vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in
the OFF position while the headlights are still on.
Then, turn off the headlights within 45 seconds. The
delay interval begins when the headlight switch is
turned off.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or
place the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will
cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition,
they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate
this feature.
31
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• The headlight delay time is programmable using
the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for
further information.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights,
either push the headlight switch a second time or
turn off the headlight switch.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster display
flash to show proper operation of the front and rear
turn signal lights.
32
NOTE:
Wiper Operation
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when
the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed
wiper operation, or to the second detent past the
intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and a continuous chime
will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal
(right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield
wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to
the windshield wipers may result if the wiper
control is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
switch and allow the wipers to return to the
park position before turning off the engine. If
the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze
to the windshield, damage to the wiper motor
may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper
control is turned off and the blades cannot
return to the off position, damage to the wiper
motor may occur.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the
multifunction lever to the first detent position, and
then turn the end of the lever to select the desired
delay interval. There are four delay settings, which
allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of
approximately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle
speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever
inward (toward the steering column) and hold it for
as long as washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate
for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
is turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe
cycles and then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
warm the windshield with the defroster before
and during windshield washer use.
Mist Feature
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the MIST
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off
road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to operate until you release the
multifunction lever.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
the windshield. The wash function must be used in
order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
splash or over spray from the windshield washers of
the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings to activate this
feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with
the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the
least sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most
sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain
conditions. Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if
the driver desires more sensitivity. The rain sensing
wipers will automatically change between an intermittent wipe, slow wipe and a fast wipe depending
on the amount of moisture that is sensed on the
windshield. Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual
for further information.
Rain Sensing Wipers
NOTE:
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the
driver. The feature is especially useful for road
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when
the wiper speed is in the low or high position.
33
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the
windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for
the wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under
the following conditions:
• Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain
Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition
is placed in the RUN position, the vehicle is stationary and the outside temperature is below 32°F
(0°C), unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the vehicle speed becomes
greater than 0 mph (0 km/h) or the outside temperature rises above freezing.
• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature
will not operate when the ignition is placed in the
RUN position, the automatic transmission gear
selector is in the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved
or the gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
34
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition
switch in the ON/RUN position, rain sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
previously) exist.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Automatic Climate
Controls
Automatic Climate Controls On The
Faceplate
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon
Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Performing this function again will cause
the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between recirculation mode
and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present.
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control
section. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
mode is not recommended.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will cause the
system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes.
Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from
the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the Front Mode
Defrost button, the climate system will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
35
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Description
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press
and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button
on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled.
Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen Buttons
Panel Mode
36
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available.
The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air.
The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Icon
Bi-Level Mode
Description
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controls off.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air
conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow
through the outlets into the cabin. For improved
fuel economy, Push A/C button to turn off the air
conditioning and manually adjust the blower and
airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select only
Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an
accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle
water spray from the front of the radiator and
through the condenser.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode and adjust blower
speed if needed.
37
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped
Automatic Operation
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and
the prior settings. The button illuminates when
MAX A/C is on.
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the
AUTO button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position
can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing
other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch to the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and
passenger temperature control buttons. Once
the desired temperature is displayed, the system
will achieve and automatically maintain that
comfort level.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high
humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish
to recirculate interior air by pressing the recirculation control button. The recirculation indicator will
illuminate when this button is selected. Press the
button a second time to turn off the recirculation
mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE:
In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead
to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create
fogging on the inside of the windshield.
38
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level,
it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the US/Metric customerprogrammable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual
for further information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan
will remain on low until the engine warms up. The
blower will increase in speed and transition into
Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system is
being used in the manual mode.
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Summer Operation
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and
blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as
possible.
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
Window Fogging
Outside Air Intake
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling system
is functioning properly and the proper amount,
type, and concentration of coolant is used. Use of
the Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is
not recommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the windows,
select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front
blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode
without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce
airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could
plug the water drains. In Winter months, make sure
the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run
the air conditioning system at idle for about five
minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting on high.
This will ensure adequate system lubrication to
minimize the possibility of compressor damage
when the system is started again.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use
a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels
can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
when needed.
39
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
COMMANDVIEW
SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED
The CommandView sunroof switch is located to
the left between the sun visors on the overhead
console.
The power shade switch is located to the right
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
1 — Opening Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
3 — Closing Sunroof
40
WARNING!
Opening Sunroof
Express Mode
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
Occupants, particularly unattended children,
can become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury
or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
parts, or any object, to project through the
sunroof opening. Injury may result.
Push the switch rearward and release it within onehalf second. The sunroof will open automatically to
the open position. This is called “Express Open”.
During Express Open operation, any movement of
the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward. The sunroof will stop automatically at the
open position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain
in a partially opened condition until the switch is
pushed and held rearward again.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when Express or Manual Open operation is initiated the
sunshade will automatically open to the half open
position prior to the sunroof opening.
Closing Sunroof
Express Mode
Push the switch forward and release it within onehalf second and the sunroof will close automatically
from any position. The sunroof will close fully and
stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”.
During Express Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement and the sunroof will remain in a
partially closed condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in
the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped)
in certain open or partially open positions. This is a
normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then
open the front and rear windows together to mini-
mize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Opening Power Shade
Express
Push the shade switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the shade will automatically
open to the halfway position and stop automatically.
Push the switch a second time from the halfway
position and the shade will automatically open to
the full open position and stop automatically. This is
called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of the shade switch will stop
the shade.
Closing Power Shade
Express
Push the switch forward and release it within onehalf second and the shade will close automatically
from any position. If the sunroof is completely
closed the shade will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will
stop the shade.
NOTE:
If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button
again will automatically close both the sunroof and
shade completely.
Manual Mode
Manual
To open the shade, push and hold the switch rearward. The shade will open and stop automatically at
the half-open position. Push and hold the shade
switch rearward again and the shade will open automatically to the full-open position. Any release of
the switch will stop the movement and the shade will
remain in a partially opened condition until the
switch is pushed again.
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement and the shade will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed
again.
41
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Venting Sunroof — Express
Sunroof Maintenance
Push and release the "Vent" button within one-half
second and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur
regardless of sunroof position. During Express Vent
operation, any movement of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically cycle to the halfway open position prior to the
sunroof opening to the Vent position.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing
of the sunroof during the Express Close operation.
If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable
and the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
42
Ignition Off Operation
NOTE:
• The power sunroof switch can remain active in
Accessory Delay for up to approximately ten minutes after the vehicle’s ignition is placed to the
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
• This feature is programmable using the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for further
information.
HOOD
To Open The Hood
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the
safety catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood.
Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the
hood in the open position.
To Close The Hood
1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the
other hand remove the support rod from its seat
and reinsert it into the locking tab.
2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) from the engine compartment and drop
it. Make sure that the hood is completely closed.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to close.
Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches.
Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
TRUNK
Trunk Safety
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency
release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked
inside the trunk, the trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark handle attached to the
trunk latching mechanism.
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close
the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended.
Once in the trunk, young children may not be
able to escape, even if they entered through the
rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children can die
from suffocation or heat stroke.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM
— IF EQUIPPED
The automatic load leveling system will provide a
level-riding vehicle under most passenger and
cargo loading conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct
height. It takes approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of
driving for the leveling to complete depending on
road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself
down. The vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
43
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
UNIVERSAL GARAGE
DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK )
• To operate HomeLink, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink buttons. These buttons
will activate the devices they are programmed to
with each press of the corresponding HomeLink
button.
Erasing All The HomeLink Channels
• The HomeLink indicator light is located above the
center button.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes.
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink
HomeLink Buttons And Indicator Light
• HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door
openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink unit is powered by
your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
• The HomeLink buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sunvisor designate the three
different HomeLink channels.
44
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being
programmed to the HomeLink system. Make sure
your hand-held transmitter is programmed to activate the device you are trying to program your
HomeLink button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of
your HomeLink before you use it for the first time.
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
Identifying Whether You Have A
Rolling Code Or Non-Rolling Code
Device
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink buttons, you must determine whether
the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically,
devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes.
A device with a rolling code will also have a
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the
antenna is attached to the device. The button may
not be immediately visible when looking at the device. The name and color of the button may vary
slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not
have a rolling code. These devices will also not have
a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
Programming HomeLink To A
Garage Door Opener
To program any of the HomeLink buttons to activate your garage door opener motor, follow the
steps below:
NOTE:
All HomeLink buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels
when programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink
button you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the garage
door opener transmitter button you are trying to
replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink indicator light. The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.
Once this happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code
final step 2, after completing rolling code final step
1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the garage door
opener motor. Firmly push and release the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button three times (holding the button for two seconds each time). If the garage
door opener motor operates, programming is
complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink button to confirm that the garage door opener motor operates. If the garage door opener motor does not
operate, repeat the final steps for the rolling
code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener
Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the HomeLink indicator light. If
the HomeLink indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink button to confirm that the garage door opener motor operates. If the garage door opener motor does not
operate, repeat the steps from the beginning.
45
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if
people or pets are in the path of the door or
gate.
• Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless
and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous
when inhaled and can cause you and others to
be severely injured or killed.
Programming HomeLink To A
Miscellaneous Device
Refer to “Programming HomeLink To A Garage
Door Opener” for the procedure on how to program HomeLink to a miscellaneous device, as it
follows the same procedure. Be sure to determine if
the device has a rolling code, or non-rolling code
before beginning the programming process.
46
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate
operators are designed to time-out in the same
manner. The procedure may need to be preformed
multiple times to successfully pair the device to your
HomeLink buttons.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink
Button
To reprogram a single HomeLink button that has
been previously trained, without erasing all the
channels, follow the procedure below. Be sure to
determine whether the new device you want to
program the HomeLink button to has a Rolling
Code, or Non-rolling Code.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button
until the HomeLink Indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink To A Garage
Door Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
The front power outlet is located inside the storage
area on the center stack of the instrument panel.
Electrical Power Outlets
Your vehicle is equipped with one 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlet on the instrument panel and one
12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet in the center console
that can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories. The power outlets are labeled with either a
“key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how the
outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a “key”
are powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered outlets should be removed or turned off when
the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery
against discharge.
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a
power outlet located in the storage area of the
center console.
Front Power Outlet
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located
on the center console on vehicles not equipped
with the ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily
injury could result.
Center Console Power Outlet
NOTE:
If the Media Hub is in use, do not exceed the
maximum power of 100 Watts (8 Amps) for the
center console power outlet. When the Media Hub
is not in use, the outlet can deliver up to 120 Watts
(10 Amps). If the power rating is exceeded, the fuse
protecting the system will need to be replaced.
47
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Instrument
Panel Power Outlet / Dual USB Charge Only
Ports
2 — #38 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Center
Console Power Outlet / Media Hub
NOTE:
The instrument panel power outlet and dual rear
console USB ports can be changed to “battery”
powered all the time by moving the #12 20 Amp
fuse from “IGN” to “B+”. Refer to “Fuses” in “In
Case Of Emergency”.
48
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type
of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
• After the use of high power draw accessories
or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in), the
vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of
time to allow the alternator to recharge the
vehicle's battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory
or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper
use of the power outlet can cause damage.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery even when
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade
the battery even more quickly. Only use these
intermittently and with greater caution.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . .50
Location And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
WARNING LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM —
OBD II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Red Warning Lights. .
Yellow Warning Lights
Yellow Indicator Lights
Green Indicator Lights
White Indicator Lights
Blue Indicator Lights .
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.52
.55
.58
.58
.59
.59
49
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information to
the driver. With the ignition in the STOP/OFF
mode, opening/closing of a door will activate the
display for viewing, and display the total miles, or
kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument cluster
display is designed to display important information
about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a
driver interactive display located on the instrument
panel, your instrument cluster display can show you
how systems are working and give you warnings
when they are not. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through the main menus
and submenus. You can access the specific information you want and make selections and adjustments.
Location And Controls
The instrument cluster display features an interactive display which is located in the instrument cluster.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select
a variety of useful information by pushing the arrow
buttons located on the left side of the steering
wheel. The instrument cluster display menu items
consist of the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the up or down arrows allows you to cycle
through the Main Menu Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title
area.
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the left or right arrow button allows you to
cycle through the submenu items of the Main menu
item.
50
NOTE:
• Holding the up/down or left/right arrow button
will loop the user through the currently selected
menu or options presented on the screen.
• Main menu and submenu’s wrap for continuous
scrolling.
• Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu
screen viewed within that main menu will be
displayed.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer:
• Pushing the OK button changes units (mph
or km/h).
For Screen Setup:
• OK button allows user to enter menus and submenus.
• Within each submenu layer, the up and down
arrows will allow the user to select the item of
interest.
• Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a
confirmation screen will appear (returning the user
to the 1st page of the submenu).
• Pushing the left arrow button will exit each submenu layer and return to the main menu.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition
For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus:
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display
controls for the following procedure(s):
• Information is reset by pushing and holding the
OK button.
Engine Oil Life Reset
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will display in the instrument cluster display for
five seconds after a single chime has sounded, to
indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The
engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle
based, which means the engine oil change interval
may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push
and release the OK or arrow buttons. To reset the oil
change indicator system (after performing the
scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start the
engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle
Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button to access the ”Oil Life” screen.
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life. If
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric display will update to show 100%. If conditions are
not met a popup message of "To reset oil life
engine must be off with ignition in run" will be
displayed (for five seconds), and the user will
remain at the Oil Life screen.
5. Push and release the up or down arrow button to
exit the submenu screen.
51
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the
engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the
ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Programmable Features
The instrument cluster display can be used to view
or change the following settings. Push the up or
down arrow button to scroll through the main
52
menus, then push the right arrow button to scroll
through the submenus of each menu item. Push the
left arrow button to scroll back to a previous menu
or submenu.
Speedometer
MPH to km/h
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist
Fuel Economy
Trip Info
Audio
Stored Messages
Screen Setup
WARNING LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as
such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or
alternative to the information contained in the
Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information
in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All
active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based
upon equipment options and current vehicle status.
Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
— Air Bag Warning Light
This light indicates a fault with the air bag, and will
turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate
with a single chime when a fault with the air bag has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is
cleared. If the light is either not on during startup,
stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
— Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate that the
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is
low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock
brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full
mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a
possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that
a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) /
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in
the master cylinder has dropped below a specified
level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed,
and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds.
The light should then turn off unless the parking
brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the
light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging
system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
— Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/
open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
53
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Electric Power Steering Fault
Warning Light
This light will turn on when there's a fault with the
EPS (Electric Power Steering) system. Refer to
“Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to inform of a
problem with the Electronic Throttle Control
(ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the
vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or flash
depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the
ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely
stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK
position. The light should turn off. If the light re-
54
mains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/
rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing. The light will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check.
If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
— Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition.
If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this
indicator will illuminate and a single chime will
sound. If the temperature reaches the upper limit, a
continuous chime will sound for four minutes or
until the engine is able to cool: whichever comes
first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it
off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off immediately
and call for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low
engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A chime
will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is
in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked
under the hood.
— Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature
to return to normal levels.
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This light indicates when the driver or passenger
seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn on. When
driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information.
— Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a high
transmission fluid temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this light
turns on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
or slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK or
NEUTRAL, until the light turns off. Once the light
turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over,
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
— Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open
and not fully closed.
— Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately
15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is
disarmed.
Yellow Warning Lights
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light
after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if
the light stays on through several typical driving
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as
possible if this occurs.
55
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures
than in normal operating conditions. This can
cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious
injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel
economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should
go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed and
corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if
it was turned off previously.
— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is
displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower
than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire
duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications
corresponding to each tire in sequence.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Active Warning Light — If Equipped
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off
Warning Light — If Equipped
CAUTION!
This light will indicate when the Electronic Stability
Control system is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light”
in the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is off.
56
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
CAUTION!
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label, you should determine
the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead
to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not of
the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to your authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
— Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.9 gal
(7.13 L), this light will turn on and a single chime will
sound.
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
57
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is
not functioning and service is required as soon as
possible. However, the conventional brake system
will continue to operate normally, assuming the
Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
— Service Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate a fault in the
Forward Collision Warning System. Contact your
local authorized dealer for service.
— LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
— Service Adaptive Cruise Control
Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the driver with
visual and steering torque warnings when the vehicle starts to drift out of its lane unintentionally
without the use of a turn signal.
This light will turn on when a ACC is not operating
and needs service. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the LaneSense indicator changes from
solid green to solid yellow.
Yellow Indicator Lights
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has
been approached and is in a lane departure situation, the LaneSense indicator changes from solid
white/green to flashing yellow.
• Refer to “LaneSense – If Equipped" in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW)" in
"Safety" for further information.
— Service LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
— Service AWD Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the LaneSense system is not operating and requires service.
Please see an authorized dealer.
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All Wheel
Drive (AWD) system is not functioning properly
and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealer.
58
— Forward Collision Warning Off
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates that Forward Collision Warning
is off.
Green Indicator Lights
— ECO Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when ECO Mode is active.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
With Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and a target
vehicle is detected. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
Without Target Vehicle Light — If Equipped
This will display the distance setting for the ACC
system when the system is engaged. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
— Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the speed
control is set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
— Front Fog Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
— LaneSense Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both
lane markings have been detected and the system is
“armed” and ready to provide visual and torque
warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
— Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is active.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the
turn signal indicator will flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash.
Turn signals can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
White Indicator Lights
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Ready Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) has been turned on, but is not set.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This light will turn on when the speed control is
ready, but not set.
— LaneSense Indicator Light —
If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not armed,
the LaneSense indicator is solid white. This occurs
when only left, right, or neither lane line has been
detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system
is ready to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs on the detected
lane line.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that
the high beam headlights are on. With the low
beams activated, push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the
high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
59
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to
pass" scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions,
engine, and transmission control systems. When
these systems are operating properly, your vehicle
will provide excellent performance and fuel
economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be
drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
60
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission control
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service
is required.
• ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driverbehavior tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection port to
allow access to information related to the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your
vehicle and emissions system.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in
“Multimedia”.
SAFETY
SAFETY
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . . . .62
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .68
SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) . . . . . . .63
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . .64
Occupant Restraint Systems Features .
Important Safety Precautions . . . . .
Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . .
Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.68
.68
.69
.76
.85
.96
. . .96
. . .97
. . .97
. . .99
61
SAFETY
AUXILIARY DRIVING
SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two
radar-based sensors, located inside the rear bumper
fascia, to detect Highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles etc.) that enter the
blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the
vehicle.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one
lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m).
The zone length starts at the outside rear view
mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides
of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
Rear Detection Zones
Blind Spot Mirror
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light
will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view
mirrors to let the driver know that the system is
operational. The BSM system sensors operate
when the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by mode when the vehicle
is in PARK.
The BSM system can also be configured to sound
an audible (chime) alert and mute the radio to
notify you of objects that have entered the detection zones.
The BSM warning light, located in the outside mirrors, will illuminate if a vehicle moves into a blind
spot zone.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
62
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
provides the driver with audible warnings and visual
warnings within the instrument cluster display, to
warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal
collision. The warnings are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate
the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system, to calculate the probability
of a forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be
provided with audible and visual warnings.
Turning FCW On Or Off
Far
The forward collision button is located in the
Uconnect display in the controls settings. When
FCW is selected "off", there will be an "FCW OFF"
icon that appears in the instrument cluster display.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting.
NOTE:
The far setting provides warnings for potential collisions more distant in front of the vehicle, allowing
the driver to have the most reaction time to avoid a
collision.
• The default status of FCW is “on”, this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent
warnings may prefer this setting.
• Changing the FCW status to “off” prevents the
system from warning you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you. If FCW is set to off,
“FCW OFF” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
NOTE:
This setting gives you the most reaction time.
Changing FCW Status
The FCW feature has two settings and can be
changed within the Uconnect System Screen:
• Far
• Near
Near
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting,
allows the system to warn you of a potential frontal
collision when you are much closer.
This setting provides less reaction time than the
“Far” setting, which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want to
avoid frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
Refer to your Owner’s Manual for further details.
63
SAFETY
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can
FCW detect every type of potential collision.
The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and
steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead
to serious injury or death.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
64
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature
effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will
not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the
recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low
tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring
[TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase
the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard
pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn
off. The system will automatically update and the
TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure
should always be set based on cold inflation tire
pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded
into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal
and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours)
placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire
pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to
20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPM Telltale
Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but
the TPM Telltale Light will still be on. In this situation, the TPM Telltale Light will turn off only after
the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for
the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage
may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. The TPM sensor is not designed for use
on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance or sensor
CAUTION!
damage. Customers are encouraged to use
OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature
operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to your authorized
dealer to have your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the TPMS
sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance or to provide warning of a
tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate
tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPM Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver
module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
65
SAFETY
off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light off.
• Various tire pressure monitoring system messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will illuminate in the instrument
cluster and a chime will sound when tire
pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display
an “Inflate to XX” message and a graphic showing
the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values shown in a different color.
66
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those shown in a different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation value
as shown in the “Inflate to XX” message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the graphic display in
the instrument cluster will change color back to the
original color, and the TPM Telltale Light will turn
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
Service Tire Pressure System Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a "Service Tire Pressure System" message for a minimum
of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place
of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not
being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the
system fault no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light
will no longer flash, and the "Service Tire Pressure
System" message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A
system fault can occur due to any of the following:
• Signal interference due to electronic devices or
driving next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPM sensors.
• Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
• Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM
sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size
does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full
size spare tire in place of a road tire that has a
pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition key cycle, the “TPMS
Telltale Light” will remain on and a chime will
sound. In addition, the graphic in the instrument
cluster will still display a different color pressure
value and an "Inflate to XX" message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a “Service Tire Pressure System” message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime
will sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid,
and the instrument cluster will display a “Service
Tire Pressure System” message for five seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
compact spare or non-matching full size, the
TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off and the
graphic in the instrument cluster will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel
and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors,
such as when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not
equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM)
Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes
67
SAFETY
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on.
The instrument cluster will display the “Service Tire
Pressure System” message and then display dashes
(--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “Service Tire
Pressure System” message in the instrument cluster
but dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure
values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with
TPM sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then turn off. The instrument cluster will display
the “Service Tire Pressure System” message and
then display pressure values in place of the dashes.
On the next ignition cycle the "Service Tire Pressure System" message will no longer be displayed as
long as no system fault exists.
General Information
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
• Child Restraints
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
68
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or
may be optional equipment on others. If you are not
sure, ask an authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a
rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rearfacing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible
and use the proper child restraint (refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further
information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for further information)
should be secured in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do
not use child restraints or belt-positioning
booster seats should ride properly buckled up in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with
your child restraint to make sure that you are
using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front
air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into
the space between occupants and the door and
occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person,
refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for
customer service contact information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a child
in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a
poor driver and could cause a collision that includes
you. This can happen far away from home or on
your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts re-
duce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury
caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert
feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard
front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when
the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/
RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until both outboard front seat
belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
69
SAFETY
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The
BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on
vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle
their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle
is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
70
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
animal or other items are placed on the outboard
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until the driver and outboard front seat
passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with
you under normal conditions. However, in a collision
the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking
the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the interior
of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can
be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure
you and others in your vehicle are buckled up
properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
WARNING!
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear their
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position to minimize
the risk of severe injury or death in the event of
a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap
part of your seat belt as low as possible and
keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be
sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized
dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest
you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
Wear your seat belt snugly.
WARNING!
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing
head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under
the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t
as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt
over your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision. You
are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision.
71
SAFETY
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt.
A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder
belt.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the
front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat
(for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp
the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to
allow the seat belt to go around your lap.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on
the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the
latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat
belt to retract fully.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
1 — Seat Belt Buckle
2 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the
shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
72
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the
latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in
the upward position without pushing or squeezing
the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder
belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears
the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer
twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of
the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck.
Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release
the anchorage, and move it up or down to the
position that serves you best.
WARNING!
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you release the anchorage button, try to
move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to
keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
73
SAFETY
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is
in its lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt
Extender should be used only if the existing seat
belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
WARNING!
Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender
when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
74
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These
devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a
collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat
Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed
can increase the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender
when the lap belt is not long enough and only
use in the recommended seating positions.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place
the shoulder belt across the chest and away from
the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the
back or under the arm.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn
child if they are wearing a seat belt.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced
immediately.
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use
the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat
belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and
under should always be properly restrained in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further
reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision.
The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to
“Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section of this
manual. The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position.
WARNING!
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull
the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as
to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you
will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts.
Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case
and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click."
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a child
in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
75
SAFETY
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking
Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.
The locked mode is only used to install rearfacing or forward-facing child restraints that
have a harness for restraining the child.
76
Supplemental Restraint Systems
(SRS)
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or
may be optional equipment on others. If you are not
sure, ask an authorized dealer.
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag
System Components. Your vehicle may be
equipped with the following Air Bag System Components:
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in
the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and
the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system
that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check,
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to
alert you if the light comes on again after initial
startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a
malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag
system. The diagnostics also record the nature of
the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In
this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
light does not come on as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected,
which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the
fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound
to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” section of this
manual.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
77
SAFETY
Front Air Bags
WARNING!
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger. The
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed
on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
78
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering
wheel or instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a child
in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A
low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A
higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects
whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is
buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that may
adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air
Bags based upon seat position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
WARNING!
functional. The protective covers for the air
bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at
all. Always wear your seat belts even though
you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury
in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags
will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including
some that may produce substantial vehicle damage
— for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that
produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an
air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full
size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than
it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver
and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and front passenger, and position the
front occupants for improved interaction with the
front air bags.
79
SAFETY
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
citizen band radios, etc.
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the outboard
side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts
and body structure.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel
below the steering column. The Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection
during a frontal impact by working together with the
seat belts, pretensioners, and front air bags.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
the space between the occupant and the door. The
SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
high force that it could injure occupants if they are
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air
Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
80
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side
Air Bag Label
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”
or “AIRBAG.”
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where
the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an
aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not
add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
WARNING!
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain
side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) determines whether the deployment of the
Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision.
The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side
impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a
left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only
and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air
Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or
some side collisions that do not impact the area of
81
SAFETY
the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags
may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions
where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep
against the door, side windows, or area where
the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all
collisions. They also help keep you in position,
away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and
sit upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a child
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
82
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright in
the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain
rollover events. The ORC determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not
a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover
events. The rollover sensing system determines if a
rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the vehicle
experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and
deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the
rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain rollover or side impact
events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong
with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags,
any or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as
the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are
similar to friction rope burns or those you might
get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor.
They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within
a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smokelike particles. The particles are a normal byproduct of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne
particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat.
If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with
cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to
fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor.
If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the
garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the
air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt
retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to
an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the following
functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(If Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response
System.
• Unlock the power door locks.
83
SAFETY
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any
of these other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
• Cut off battery power to the:
– Engine
– Electric Motor (if equipped)
– Electric power steering
– Brake booster
– Electric park brake
– Automatic transmission gear selector
– Horn
– Front wiper
– Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the
key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in
the engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. If there are
no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical
devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the
system by following the procedure described below.
84
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
System functions after an event, the ignition switch
must be changed from ignition START or ON/
RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the
ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank
before resetting the system and starting the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind
of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
WARNING!
who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag
system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If
your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including
removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons with
disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data
that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record
data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding
of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries
occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the
EDR data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at
all times, including babies and children. Every state
in the United States, and every Canadian province,
requires that small children ride in proper restraint
systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted
for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
to hold even an infant on your lap could become
so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
WARNING!
could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the
child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have
the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and
follow all the instructions and warnings in the child
restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to
www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or call:
1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
85
SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or
until they reach either the height or weight limit of
their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child
restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers
and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth
until they reach the weight or height limit of the
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle.
86
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits of
their child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown
the height or weight limit of their booster seat
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a child
in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can
ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing
child seats and convertible child seats used in the
forward-facing direction are for children who are
over two years old or who have outgrown the rearfacing weight or height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should remain in a
forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long
as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat
belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees
bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s
back is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltpositioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by
the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle,
do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint
attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When
the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall
the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it
in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough
to bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a
rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide
whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt
alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back
of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the
front of the vehicle seat – while the child is still
sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this
vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt,
check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the
seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position. If the
shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
87
SAFETY
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the
shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
which may result in serious injury or death. A
child must always wear both the lap and shoulder
portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
88
Combined Weight
of the Child + Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
X
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a
top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In
these seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
89
SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of
combined weight of the child and the child restraint is
the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor
system to attach the child restraint?
instead of the LATCH system once the combined
weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt
forward-facing child restraint.
be used together to attach a rear-facing or
No
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
forward-facing child restraint?
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual
for more information.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more
child restraints. If the center position does not have
Can two child restraints be attached using a
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt
No
common lower LATCH anchorage?
to install a child seat in the center position next to a
child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an
outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the front
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also
Yes
of the front passenger seat?
allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual
for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed?
No
90
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel between
the rear seatback and the rear window. They are
found under a plastic cover with the tether anchorage symbol on it.
straints and some rear-facing child restraints will also
be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will
have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether
anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position
blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do not use that outboard position. If
a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a
child seat in that outboard position.
WARNING!
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH Anchorage Locations
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to
the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child re-
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint.
Please refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compatible
Child Restraint” for typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
91
SAFETY
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the
Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt
each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on
the tether strap of the child seat so that you can
more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the
vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second
row seats, you may need to recline the seat and /
or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the
rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in
the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rearmost position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
92
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it
to the top tether anchorage. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the
belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to
secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a
child if they play with it and accidentally lock the
seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint
using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind
the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not
lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and that they should
not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat
belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items
or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of
a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint
so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked
mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for
additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for more information.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR = Switchable
Automatic Locking
Retractor
Top Tether
Anchorage Symbol
93
SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?
recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
Yes
the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint
the front passenger seat?
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed?
No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position
No
belt against the belt path of the child restraint?
with an ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of
a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
94
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may
need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat
step 5.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear
a “click.”
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat
belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow
the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As
the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This means the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking mode.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion around the child restraint while
you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and
tighten the tether strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the
belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat,
including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
that seating position, located behind the top of
the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint
System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan
to install the child restraint to find the tether
anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for
that seating position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor
directly behind the seat where you are placing
the child restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path for the strap between the anchor and the
child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint,
and where possible, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the two posts.
95
SAFETY
If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass
the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your
pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and
possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic
braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Center Tether Attachment
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap
Hook
B — Tether Anchor
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint
to the top tether anchorage as shown in the
diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
96
1. Lower the adjustable center head restraint to the
full down position.
2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and
head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint
to the center tether anchorage located in the
panel between the rear seatback and the rear
window.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or
rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent
mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and
adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is
raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make
Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must
be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e.,
bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any
question regarding seat belt or retractor condition,
replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at your
authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the bulb
check, this light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the Air Bag System has been
detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed.
97
SAFETY
If the light comes on intermittently or remains on
while driving, have your authorized dealer service
the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your
defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals.
Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using
the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of
position and interfere with the accelerator, brake or
clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
98
WARNING!
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and cause a
loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
your floor mat
• ALWAYS securely attach
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install
your floor mat upside down or turn your floor
mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other floor mat. NEVER
install or stack an additional floor mat on top
of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, only
use a FCA approved floor mat for the specific
make, model, and year of your vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interference, with the vehicle properly parked with the
engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the
brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to
check for interference. If your floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when the
vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals.
WARNING!
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
each pedal to check for interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then reinstall the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using
the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make
Outside The Vehicle
lights and exterior lights while you work the controls.
Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on
the instrument panel.
Tires
Door Latches
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other
objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the
tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper
cold inflation pressure.
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Lights
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if
gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid
leaks are suspected. The cause should be located
and corrected immediately.
Have someone observe the operation of brake
99
100
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . .102
Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . .104
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . .105
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission. . . . . .106
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED . . . .109
SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . .109
To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . .110
To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . .110
To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . .111
To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
General Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Activation . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Set A Desired ACC Speed . .
To Vary The ACC Speed . . . .
To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting The Following Distance .
Changing Modes (ACC Only) .
General Information . . . . . . .
.112
.112
.112
.113
.114
.114
.114
.115
LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Turning LaneSense On Or Off . . . . . . . . .117
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR
PARK ASSIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . .121
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Activation/Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . .116
LANESENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP
CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
REFUELING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . .118
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release . . . . . .119
Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings). . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . .121
101
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust
the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt,
and if present, instruct all other occupants to buckle
their seat belts.
WARNING!
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
Normal Starting
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock
the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
102
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, push the button
again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short pushes in a row with the
vehicle speed above 5 MPH (8 km/h) before the
engine will shut off. The ignition will remain in the
ACC mode until the gear selector is in PARK
and the button is pushed twice to the OFF
mode.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
with the vehicle speed above 5 MPH (8 km/h),
the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle Not
In Park” message and the engine will remain
running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK
position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once with
the vehicle speed below 5 MPH (8 km/h), the engine will shut off and the ignition will remain in the
ACC position. If vehicle speed drops below
1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h), the vehicle will AutoPark. See
AutoPark section for further details.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions —
With Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In
PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF,
ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition modes
without starting the vehicle and use the accessories,
follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
to place the ignition to the ACC mode.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to place the ignition to the RUN mode.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
time to return the ignition to the OFF mode.
AutoPark
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations on the
following pages occur. It is a back up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary method by
which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage
are outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
• Driver inattention could lead to failure to
place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is
indicated in the instrument cluster display and
near the gear selector. If the "P" indicator is
blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an
added precaution, always apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle.
• AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle
into PARK.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns
off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary selector and an
8-speed transmission
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle Speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Go equipped vehicles, The engine will
turn off and the ignition switch will change to ACC
Mode. After 30 minutes the ignition switches to
OFF automatically, unless the driver turns the ignition switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary selector and an
8-speed transmission
• Vehicle is not in PARK
103
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Vehicle speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
WARNING!
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P
then Shift to Gear”will display in the instrument
cluster.
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the
vehicle speed drops below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km). A
vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll.
As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed in the instrument cluster. In these cases, the
gear selector must be returned to “P” to select
desired gear.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument cluster display and near the gear selector. As
an added precaution, always apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle.
• Driver’s door is ajar
• Brake Pedal is not depressed
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less.
The MESSAGE “Vehicle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h).
104
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in
your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good
break-in. However, wide-open throttle acceleration
in low gear can be detrimental and should be
avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
installed at the factory is high-quality and energyconserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should
be consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first
few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in
and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
Please check your oil level with the engine oil indicator often during the break in period. Add oil as
required.
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting
the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to
a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
WARNING!
WARNING!
speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission
is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
105
STARTING AND OPERATING
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting
the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to
a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
106
WARNING!
WARNING!
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission
is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic gear selector located on the center console.
The transmission gear range (PRNDL/S) is displayed both above the gear selector and in the
instrument cluster. To select a gear range, simply
rotate the gear selector. To access the L or S position, push down on the gear selector and then rotate
it. You must also press the brake pedal to shift the
transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds). To shift
past multiple gear ranges at once (such as PARK to
DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector position and the actual transmission gear (for
example, driver selects PARK while driving), the
position indicator will blink continuously until the
selector is returned to the proper position, or the
requested shift can be completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts
its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with
environmental and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the
first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat
abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision
shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the
brake pedal when shifting between these gears.
Standard Gear Selector
The standard transmission gear selector has PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift
positions. Using the LOW position manually downshifts the transmission to a lower gear based on
vehicle speed.
AutoStick — If Equipped
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control, giving you more
control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts
and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many
other situations.
Operation
Gear Selector
Premium Gear Selector With AutoStick
The premium transmission gear selector provides
PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and
SPORT shift positions. Manual shifts can be made
using the AutoStick shift control (shift paddles
mounted on the steering wheel). Pressing the shift
paddles (-/+) while in the DRIVE or SPORT position will manually select the transmission gear, and
will display the current gear in the instrument cluster
as 1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to “AutoStick” in this section for
further information.
When the transmission is in DRIVE or SPORT
mode, it will operate automatically, shifting between
the eight available gears. To engage AutoStick, simply tap one of the steering wheel-mounted shift
paddles (+/-) while in DRIVE or SPORT mode. In
DRIVE mode, this will activate a temporary
AutoStick mode. The transmission will revert back
to normal operation after a period of time, depending on accelerator pedal activity. When the transmission gear selector is in the SPORT position,
tapping either shift paddle will activate "permanent" AutoStick mode. The transmission will remain
in AutoStick mode until the driver deliberately dis-
107
STARTING AND OPERATING
ables AutoStick (as described below). Tapping (-)
to enter AutoStick will downshift the transmission to
the next lower gear, while using (+) to enter
AutoStick will retain the current gear. When
AutoStick is active, the current transmission gear is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver,
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition
would result. It will remain in the selected gear until
another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as
described below.
• If AutoStick is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is
fully depressed, the transmission will downshift
when possible (based on current vehicle speed
and gear). Lack of accelerator pedal activity will
cause the transmission to revert to automatic operation.
• If AutoStick is engaged while the transmission
gear selector is in the SPORT position, manual
gear selection will be maintained until the gear
selector is returned to DRIVE, or as described
108
below. The transmission will not upshift automatically at redline in this mode, nor will downshifts be
obtained if the accelerator pedal is pressed to the
floor.
• In either DRIVE or SPORT mode, the transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle
slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will display
the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to
first gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the
driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission
as the vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second
gear. Tapping (+) at a stop will allow starting in
second gear. Starting out in second gear can be
helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too
low of a vehicle speed.
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed will downshift
the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the
current speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if
a fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, press and hold the
(+) shift paddle until "D" or "S" is once again indicated in the instrument cluster. Shifting out of
SPORT mode will also disable AutoStick. You can
shift in or out of AutoStick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing
a collision or personal injury.
SPORT MODE —
IF EQUIPPED
Sport Mode will provide improved throttle response
and modified shifting for an enhanced driving experience, as well the greatest amount of steering
feel. This mode may be activated and deactivated
by pushing the Sport button on the instrument
panel switch bank.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
Sport Mode Button
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature.
This mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast driving. The engine, transmission and steering systems are all set to their SPORT settings.
Speed Control Switches
1 — Push Cancel
2 — Push Set (+)/Accel
3 — Push Resume
4 — Push On/Off
5 — Push Set (-)/Decel
109
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if
multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Speed
Control on/off button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. “CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear in
the instrument cluster display to indicate the Speed
Control is on. To turn the system off, push the
on/off button a second time. “CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instrument cluster
display to indicate the Speed Control is off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident.
Always leave the system OFF when you are not
using it.
110
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or
SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Once a speed has been set, a message “CRUISE
CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)” will appear
indicating what speed was set. A cruise indicator
lamp, along with set speed will also appear and stay
on in the instrument cluster when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through
the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s
Manual for more information. The speed increment
shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease
speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through
the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s
Manual for more information. The speed increment
shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a
1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When
the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set
speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain
the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without Speed
Control.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (ACC )
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do
not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control without
erasing the set speed from memory.
Adaptive Cruise Switches
1 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
2 — Distance Setting – Decrease
3 — Distance Setting – Increase
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
111
STARTING AND OPERATING
If your vehicle is equipped with Adaptive Cruise
Control, the controls operate exactly the same as
Speed Control with only a couple of differences.
With this option, you can set a specified distance
you would like to maintain between you and the
vehicle in front of you.
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration automatically
to maintain a preset following distance, while
matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
Activation
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted
to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is set when the
vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set
speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in
front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you
do not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display
in the instrument cluster display.
• The system will not be controlling the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The
vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.
“ACC READY” will appear in the instrument cluster
display to indicate the ACC is on.
To Vary The ACC Speed
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
To Increase Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push
the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and
release. The instrument cluster display will display
the set speed.
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
112
The driver's preferred units can be selected through
the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your
Owner’s Manual for further information. The speed
increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a
1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until
the button is released. The increase in set speed is
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments
until the button is released. The increase in set
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased
by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through
the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your
Owner’s Manual for further details. The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements
until the button is released. The decrease in set
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements
until the button is released. The decrease in set
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET (+) button
or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed will be the
current speed of the vehicle.
• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if
the engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake
system will automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full
stop when following a target vehicle. If an ACC
host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a standstill,
after two seconds the driver will either have to
push the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing
set speed.
• The ACC will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for two seconds in the stop position. If the
target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds, the ACC system will display a message
that the system will release the brakes and that the
brakes must be applied manually. An audible
chime will sound when the brakes are released.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up hill and down hill. However, a slight speed
change on moderate hills is normal. In addition,
downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or
descending downhill. This is normal operation and
necessary to maintain set speed. When driving up
hill and down hill, the ACC system will cancel if the
braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES
(resume) button and then remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a
113
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing
traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for
safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings
can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
Deactivation
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button a second time to turn the
system off.
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off” will appear
in the instrument cluster display to indicate the
ACC is off.
WARNING!
Leaving the ACC system on when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You
could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
114
Setting The Following Distance
The specified following distance for ACC can be
set by varying the distance setting between four
bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets
the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance
setting appears in the instrument cluster display.
• To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Setting—Increase button and release. Each time
the button is pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
• To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting—Decrease button and release. Each
time the button is pushed, the distance setting
decreases by one bar (shorter).
Changing Modes (ACC Only)
If desired, the Adaptive Cruise Control mode can
be turned off and the system can be operated as
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode. While
in the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode
the distance setting feature will be disabled and the
system will maintain the speed you set.
• To change between the different cruise control
modes, push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
on/off button which turns the ACC and the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off.
• Pushing the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode.
Refer to your Owner’s Manual for further details.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience system. It is not a substitute for active
driving involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and
weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to
the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death
or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
WARNING!
The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or
missing distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target
vehicle does not start moving within two seconds the ACC system will display a message
that the system will release the brakes and that
the brakes must be applied manually. An audible chime will sound when the brakes are
released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving
at a constant speed.
The Cruise Control system has two control
modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For
additional information, refer to “Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in your
Owner’s Manual.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not
react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise
Control buttons. The two control modes function differently. Always confirm which mode is
selected.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND
REAR PARK ASSIST
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle
that is within the sensors field of view. The sensors
115
STARTING AND OPERATING
can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from the
front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
When an object is detected within 79 inches
(200 cm) behind the rear bumper while the vehicle
is in REVERSE, a warning will appear in the instrument cluster display. In addition a chime will sound
(when Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect System screen). As the vehicle moves
closer to the object, the chime rate will change from
single 1/2 second tone (for rear only), to slow (for
rear only), to fast, to continuous.
116
Activation/Deactivation
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the
rear and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle
when backing up or moving forward, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped with
an Automatic Transmission, the vehicle brakes may
be automatically applied and released when performing a reverse parking maneuver if the system
detects a possible collision with an obstacle.
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector
is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at
one of these gear selector positions, the system will
remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A display
warning will appear in the instrument cluster display
indicating the vehicle is above ParkSense operating
speed. The system will become active again if the
vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
When the ParkSense switch is pushed
to disable the system, the instrument
cluster will display the “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for approximately five
seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your
Owner’s Manual for further information. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system
is disabled, the instrument cluster display will show
the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system is
enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and
requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
General Warnings
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE FRONT SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster display, clean the ParkSense sensors
with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not
use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the
sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
LANESENSE
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a forward
looking camera to detect lane markings and measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
haptic warning in the form of torque applied to the
steering wheel to prompt the driver to remain within
the lane boundaries. If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the lane, the LaneSense sys-
tem provides a visual warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to remain
within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by applying torque into the steering wheel at
any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking
(no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides visual and haptic warnings through the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to remain
within the lane. When only a single lane marking is
detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands
are on the steering wheel and provides an audible
warning to the driver when the driver’s hands are not
detected on the steering wheel. The system will
cancel if the driver does not return their hands to the
wheel.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The default status of LaneSense is off.
The LaneSense button is located on the center
stack below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense
system on, push the LaneSense button (LED turns
off). A “LaneSense On”
message is shown in the
instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense
system off, push the LaneSense button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state, on or off, from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
117
STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKVIEW REAR BACK
UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an onscreen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The ParkView camera is located on the
rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate. The
image will be displayed in the touchscreen display
along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual
for further details.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
feature and it is turned on, the rear camera image
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds when the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. However, this
feature is canceled if the forward vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted
into PARK, the vehicle's ignition is cycled to OFF,
or by pressing the image defeat [X] button.
118
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
Camera Delay turned off), the rear camera mode is
exited and the last touchscreen appears again.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and
its projected backup path based on the steering
wheel position. The active guide lines will show
separate zones that will help indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the
rear of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up
on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
REFUELING THE
VEHICLE
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located in
the driver's door map pocket).
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while
refueling.
NOTE:
Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Maintain nozzle in filler for 5 seconds to allow
nozzle to drain.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Fuel Door Release Button
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly
push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup
and re-release the fuel door using the inside
release button. Do not pry on the door.
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside
the pipe seals the system.
NOTE:
A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for
emergency refueling with a gas can.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the
tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the
fuel filler door emergency release located in the
trunk.
Emergency Fuel Funnel
119
STARTING AND OPERATING
Follow the steps below to open the fuel door in case
of an emergency:
Materials Added To Fuel
1. Open the trunk.
Designated TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and
fuel system deposits.
When available, the usage
of TOP TIER Detergent
gasoline is recommended.
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
2. Remove the access cover (located on the left
side inner trim panel).
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
Fuel Door Emergency Release
3. Pull the release cable.
120
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine/Transmission
3.6L Automatic
Frontal Area
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m)
5.7L Automatic
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for further information.
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
RECREATIONAL
TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the
ground, or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED.
The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle
(behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with
all four wheels OFF the ground.
Max. Tongue Weight (See Note)
100 lbs (45 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
121
122
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . .124
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . .132
MANUAL PARK RELEASE. . . . . . . .139
Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
Preparations For Jacking . . . . .
Jacking And Changing A Tire. . .
Road Tire Installation . . . . . . .
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . .140
BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . .124
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Rear Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.132
.133
.133
.136
JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . .141
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models . . . . . . . .142
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models . . . . . . .142
Preparations For Jump Start . . . . . . . . . . .137
Jump Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .138
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . .139
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . .143
123
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING
FLASHERS
Control
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second
time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it
when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance,
the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or
glass cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not
approved and should not be used for replacement.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may discharge the battery.
Interior Bulbs
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
Visor Vanity Lamps
Glove Compartment Lamp – If Equipped
Door Courtesy
Shift Indicator Lamp
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
124
Bulb Number
W5W
562
578
A6220
194
562
JKLE14140
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
9005HL+
D3S (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
PSY24WSV
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen Headlamp)
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon Headlamp)
Front Turn Signal Lamp
Front Park Lamp
Daytime Running Lamp
Front Fog Lamp – If Equipped
Front Sidemarker Lamp
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Lamp
Rear Sidemarker Lamp
Backup Lamp
Center High Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
License
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or
WARNING!
WARNING!
any other material. Do not place a fuse inside a
circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to
use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services are
switched off and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems (engine system, transmission system)
or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
125
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
General Information
Underhood Fuses
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current.
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in
the engine compartment. This module contains
fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are printed on the inside of the power distribution center cover.
When a device does not work, you must check the
fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power outlets
for extended periods of time with the engine off
may result in vehicle battery discharge.
Cavity
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
126
Cartridge Fuse
–
40 Amp Green
50 Amp Red
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
50 Amp Red / 20 Amp Blue
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure
to do so may allow water to get into the power
distribution center and possibly result in an
electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other
than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the
circuit that must be corrected.
Description
Fuse – Spare
Radiator Fan #1 – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
Electric Power Steering #1 – If Equipped
Starter
Anti Lock Brake
Anti Lock Brake
Police Ignition Run / ACC #1
Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2
Cavity
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
–
23
24
28
29
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
50 Amp Red
50 Amp Red
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
40 Amp Green / 20 Amp
Blue – Police
20 Amp Blue
50 Amp Red / 20 Amp Blue
–
–
30
31
32
33
–
–
–
–
–
25 Amp Clear
–
–
22
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
Description
All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
Intrusion MOD (300) – If Equipped / Under Hood Lamp – Police
Horns
Air Conditioning Clutch
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Left HID – If Equipped
Right HID – If Equipped
Radiator Fan – (Non 6.2L Supercharged)
Electric Power Steering #2 – If Equipped
Wiper Motor
Headlamp Washers – If Equipped
Police Bat Feed #2
Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Bat Feed # 3
Police Bat Feed # 1
Radiator Fan (6.2L Supercharged) / Police Ignition Run/ACC Feed # 3
Fuse – Spare
Transmission Control Module (Challenger/Charger Police) /
Electronic Shift Module (Challenger)
Fuse – Spare
Engine Module
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
127
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
34
35
36
37
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
25 Amp Clear
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
38
39
–
–
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
48
49
50
51
52
53
–
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
–
Rear Interior Fuses
There is also a power distribution center located in
the trunk under the spare tire access panel. This
center contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are printed on the inside of the
power distribution center cover.
128
Description
Powertrain #1
Powertrain #2
Anti-Lock Brake Module
Engine Controller / Rad Fan Relays (Charger/300) /
Electric Power Steering Module (Charger/300) / 5-Speed TCM
Airbag Module
EPS (Challenger) / EHPS (Police) / AC Clutch Relay /
Vacuum Pump Relay / Rad Fan Relays (Challenger)
AWD Module/Front Axle Disconnect – If Equipped
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Vacuum Pump
Adaptive Cruise – If Equipped
Fuse – Spare
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure
to do so may allow water to get into the power
distribution center and possibly result in an
electrical system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other
than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the
circuit that must be corrected.
Cavity
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
–
60 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
40 Amp Green
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink
–
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
5 Amp Tan
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
Description
Front PDC Feed #1
Fuse – Spare
Front PDC Feed #2
Sunroof/Dome Lamp – Police
Exterior Lighting #1
Exterior Lighting #2
Interior Lighting
Power Locks
Driver Door Control Module
Passenger Door Control Module
Dual USB Center Console Rear/Cigar Lighter IP – If Equipped
HVAC Blower
Left Spot Lamp – Police
Right Spot Lamp – Police
Mod Network Interface – Police
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuel Pump (Non 6.2L SRT Demon)
Cyber Gateway Mod
Fuel Door/Diagnostic Port
Integrated Center Stack
Tire Pressure Monitor
129
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
26
27
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
130
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
15 Amp Blue
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
25 Amp Clear
25 Amp Breaker
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
5 Amp Tan
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
–
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
Description
Cygnus Transmission Module (Charger/300) /
Electronic Shift Module (Charger/300)
Amplifier – If Equipped
Power Seats – If Equipped
HVAC Module/Cluster
Ignition Switch/RF Hub Module/Steering Column Lock (300) – If Equipped
Steering Column Module/Clock (300)
Battery Sensor
Electronic Exhaust Valve – If Equipped
Radio
Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest/Console Media Hub
Fuel Pump (6.2L SRT Demon – If Equipped)
Fuel Pump (6.2L SRT Demon – If Equipped)
Rear Defrost
Comfort Seat And Steering Wheel Module
(Heated Steering Wheel/RR Heated Seats)
Park Assist / Blind Spot / Rear View Camera
Cluster / Rearview Mirror / Compass (Charger/300) / Humidity Sensor /
Forward Facing Camera (Lane Departure) / Cyber Gateway
Fuse – Spare
Adaptive Front Lighting / Day Time Running Lamps – If Equipped
Active Suspension – (6.4L / 6.2L)
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Cavity
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
–
25 Amp Breaker
10 Amp Red
–
10 Amp Red
68
–
10 Amp Red
69
70
–
–
–
–
Description
Front Heated / Vented Seats – If Equipped
Heated Cupholders/Rear Heated Seat Switches – If Equipped
HVAC Module/In Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Airbag Module
Adjustable Pedals – Police
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Rear Windows (Charger/300)
Airbag Module
Fuse – Spare
Rain and Light Sensor / Sunroof / Inside RR View Mirror / Police Run Acc Relay
Dual USB Power Outlet – R/A Sense (Charger/300) Rear Sunshade (Charger/300)
RR USB Timer
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
131
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACKING AND TIRE
CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it
to a service center where it can be raised on a
lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
is on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
132
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an
access cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to
access the jack and spare tire.
3. Rotate the fastener securing the spare tire counterclockwise to remove it.
NOTE:
The spare tire must be removed in order to access
the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
Spare Tire Fastener
Spare Tire/Tools Location
1 — Jack Beneath Spare Tire
2 — Spare Tire
3 — Pull Strap
4. Remove the spare tire.
5. Rotate the fastener securing the jack counterclockwise to remove it.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice
or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Jack Fastener
6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from
under the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the
left to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the
wrench from the jack assembly.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare
tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat)
tire repaired or replaced immediately.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example,
if the right front wheel is being changed, block
the left rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
133
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
WARNING!
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
to be raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
• Do not let any passenger sit in the vehicle
when it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be raised
on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the
center cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug
wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before
raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on
the ground.
Jacking Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
134
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is
closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift
area of the sill flange.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is too low for jack placement,
slide the jack on its side and rotate it up into
position.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat
tire and install the spare tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
Install Compact Spare
135
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to
install a center cap or wheel cover on the
compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to
“Limited-Use Spare” under “Tires—General
Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance”
in your Owner’s Manual for additional warnings, cautions, and information about the
spare tire, its use, and operation.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of
the lug nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the
jack handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a
star pattern until each nut has been tightened
twice. For the correct lug nut torque, refer to
“Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifications”. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by
your authorized dealer or at a service station.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the
base of the jack faces the front of the vehicle
before tightening down the fastener.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the
jack handle counterclockwise.
WARNING!
4. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications” for proper lug nut torque.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
136
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the lug nuts.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts
are properly seated against the wheel.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system voltage
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
starter motor, alternator or electrical system may
occur.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and cycle the ignition to
OFF.
Jump Starting Locations
(+) — Remote Positive Post
(-) — Remote Negative Post
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the
trunk. Remote battery posts are located on the right
side of the engine compartment for jump starting.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be
injured by moving fan blades.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary
electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery,
park the vehicle within the jumper cables’ reach,
set the parking brake and make sure the ignition
is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.
137
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper
cables in the reverse sequence:
WARNING!
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable from the remote negative (-) post of the
discharged vehicle.
Jump Starting Procedure
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper
cables are not contacting each other or either vehicle while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only
use the specific ground point, do not use any
other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
to the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
CAUTION!
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 rpm since it provides no charging benefit,
wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle
engine.
138
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post
of the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charging
system tested at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine
operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge
sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
IF YOUR ENGINE
OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce
the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine
idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with
the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this
heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the
blower control to high. This allows the heater core
to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in
removing heat from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant
bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear
continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake before activating the Manual Park
Release. In addition, you should be seated in the
driver's seat with your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when activating the Manual Park Release.
Activating the Manual Park Release will allow
your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the
parking brake, or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury
or death for those in or around the vehicle.
139
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a
dead battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the console storage bin to access the
Manual Park Release lever.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the
tether strap up through the opening in the console base.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center
of the lever, and disengage the lever locking tab
by pushing it to the right.
6. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged
position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever
up and rearward, until it locks in place in the
vertical position. The vehicle is now out of PARK
and can be moved. Release the parking brake
only when the vehicle is securely connected to a
tow vehicle.
140
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
NOTE:
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the
rear side) rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever.
• Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two seconds, you must press
the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward
and down, to its original position, until the locking tab snaps into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that
the lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console. Reinstall the console storage bin.
FREEING A STUCK
VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow,
it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn
the steering wheel right and left to clear the area
around the front wheels. Then, shift back and forth
between DRIVE and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
• Push the "ESC Off" switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in "Partial Off"
mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Safety” in your
Owner’s Manual for further information. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the "ESC Off" switch
again to restore "ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause
damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A
tire could explode and injure someone. Do not
spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and
do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after
every five rocking-motion cycles. This will
minimize overheating and reduce the risk of
transmission failure during prolonged efforts
to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
fast may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not
spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while
in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The Ground
Flat Tow
NONE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
RWD MODELS
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
Front
NOT RECOMMENDED
(but, if used, same limitations as above)
Rear
NOT RECOMMENDED
ALL
BEST METHOD
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Flatbed
TOWING A DISABLED
VEHICLE
AWD MODELS
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED, but, if used:
• Ignition in ON/RUN mode
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
(NOT in PARK)
BEST METHOD
Refer to your Owner's Manual for further information.
141
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars
and other equipment designed for this purpose,
following equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar
or other towing device to main structural members
of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under
tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters,
etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's battery
is discharged, refer to "Manual Park Release" in this
section for instructions on shifting the transmission
out of PARK for towing.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a
flatbed.
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a
flatbed.
If the transmission and driveline are operable, AWD
models can also be towed with the ignition in the
ON/RUN mode, the transmission in NEUTRAL
(not in PARK!), and the rear wheels OFF the
ground with no limitation on speed or distance.
Since the ignition MUST be in the ON/RUN mode
to tow in this manner, AWD vehicles must be towed
with ALL FOUR wheels OFF the ground (e.g. on a
flatbed truck) if the key fob is unavailable.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, this vehicle may be flat towed
(with all four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
CAUTION!
• Towing this vehicle using any other method
can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage.
• Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
142
• The automatic transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to "Manual Park Release" in this
section for instructions on shifting the transmission
to NEUTRAL when the engine is off.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles
(48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle
must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
farther than 30 miles (48 km), then the only acceptable method of towing is with a flatbed truck.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT
RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the Enhanced
Accident Response System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER
(EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the Event Data
Recorder (EDR).
143
144
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING . . . . . . .146
TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Maintenance Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Tire Safety Information . . . .
Tires — General Information .
Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tires — If Equipped . . .
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .
ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . . .149
3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . .151
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.151
.158
.162
.163
.164
DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE
QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
145
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indicator
system will remind you that it is time to take your
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,
trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence when the
“Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause
the change oil message to illuminate as early as
3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
The “Oil Change Required” message will be displayed in the instrument cluster and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
by someone other than your authorized dealer, the
message can be reset by referring to “Instrument
146
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in this guide, or “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” in the Owner’s Manual.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and power steering (if
equipped) and fill as needed.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first.
The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally
only a concern for fleet customers.
Maintenance Plan
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off-road environment, or is
operated predominantly at idle or only very low
engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance Intervals:
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals.
•
•
•
•
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated
By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even
if it occurs before your next scheduled service
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals
as required
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
•
Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
•
Inspect exhaust system
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before your next scheduled
service.
•
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
• Check engine oil level.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Or Years:
32,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals, and replace if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Adjust park brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
X
X
X
X
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Replace spark plugs. **
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X
Change the transfer case fluid; if using your vehicle for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing. (All Wheel Drive Only).
Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive
(AWD) change the front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
147
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Do only service work for
which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low
engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
148
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L Engine
1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
4 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
149
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5.7L Engine
1 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
3 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
4 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
150
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
RAISING THE VEHICLE
NOTE:
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle,
go to an authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and Definitions,
Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT
Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size
Designation
3 — Service
Description
4 — Maximum
Load
5 — Maximum
Pressure
6 — Treadwear,
Traction and Temperature Grades
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall
beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is
absent from this tire size designation. Example:
215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
U.S. design standards. The size designation for
LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
151
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
• Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
• "R" means radial construction, or
• "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
• A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
• A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road
conditions, and posted speed limits)
152
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the
tire; however, the date code may only be on one
side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN,
including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the
vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side,
then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 03 means the 3rd week
153
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE:
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent
the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
154
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original
equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
inflate to the recommended pressure for your vehicle.
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Loading
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire
size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on
the Tire and Loading Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of your Owner’s Manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
155
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight
(if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
156
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The
following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not be
accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of
your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865
lbs (392 kg).
157
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use
tires of the recommended load capacity for your
vehicle. Never overload them.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
NOTE:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can
result in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire
failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.
158
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause
the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's
side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation.
Tires may look properly inflated even when they
are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation
pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours,
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide
range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures
vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this
in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and
the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold
tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi
(21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(7°C) for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be
too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits
or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven
at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation
pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure
and reduced vehicle loading may be required for
high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
on your tires could cause them to fail. You could
have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four.
Never combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
it meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a 1/4 of an inch
(6 mm).
159
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and Speed
Symbol).
Tire Spinning
Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires
should be replaced.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid
loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation
is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat
mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or
below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches
the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities
and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat
tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run
flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more
information.
160
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause
tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's
wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more
than 30 seconds continuously when you are
stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators,
the tire should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement
Tires” in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
Replacement Tires
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends
that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size,
quality and performance when replacement is
needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear
Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will
be found on the original equipment tire sidewall.
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop
across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for
earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire
failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from
contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire
Safety Information” section of this manual for more
information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may
adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of
your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for your
vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved
tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious
injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire overload-
161
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
ing and failure. You could lose control and
have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels
may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or
MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season
tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
162
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed
for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter
tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures
are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with
ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to
do so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe
injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions
also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size
and type to the original
equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice,
skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some
states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws
should be checked before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In
Case Of Emergency” in the Owner’s Manual for
further information.
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped
with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire
description on the Tire and Loading Information
Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or
on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding
the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with a compact or limited use temporary
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in
the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has
this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the
recommended tire rotation pattern.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and
reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since
the wheel is designed specifically for the compact
spare tire. Do not install more than one compact
spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given
time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do
not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Tempo-
WARNING!
rary use spares have limited tread life. When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced.
Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped
with a collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire
description on the Tire and Loading Information
Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or
on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/8017 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and
reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible
tire using the electric air pump before lowering the
vehicle.
163
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do
not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced.
Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators,
the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be
164
replaced. Since it is not the same as your original
equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive
more than the speed listed on the limited use
spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
WARNING!
B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door.
Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of
vehicle control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain
their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels
with the same soap solution recommended for the
body of the vehicle and remember to always wash
when the surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused
by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used
to melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft
cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away
promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff
brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective
coating that helps keep them from corroding and
tarnishing.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners
and automatic car washes may damage the
wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar
Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome Cleaner or
their equivalent is recommended or select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
brakes to remove the water droplets from the brake
components. This activity will remove the red rust
on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle vibration
when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
on a regular basis; this is all that is required to
maintain this finish.
DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADES
The following tire grading categories were
established by the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration. The specific grade
rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in
each category is shown on the sidewall of
the tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
Federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
one-half times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The relative
165
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
166
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can
lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance,
which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA . . . . . . . .168
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . .168
WHEEL AND TIRE
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . .168
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
FLEXIBLE FUEL
(3.6L ENGINE ONLY) . . . . . . . . . .169
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . .169
MOPAR ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . .172
FLUID CAPACITIES. . . . . . . . . . . .170
Authentic Accessories By Mopar . . . . . . . .172
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . .171
167
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is also
located on the right front strut tower inside the
engine compartment.
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the
left front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is
visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration, and
the title.
WHEEL AND TIRE
TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should
be torqued using a properly calibrated torque
wrench using a high quality six sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
Torque Specifications
Base Model Vehicle
VIN Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VIN Location
168
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
130 Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
22 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended
lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil
before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
FLEXIBLE FUEL
(3.6L ENGINE ONLY )
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the
socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not
insert it halfway).
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible
Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified
by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol
(E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only and/or a yellow fuel cap. Refer to the Owner’s Manual for further information.
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
CAUTION!
Torque Pattern
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label
or a yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in personal injury.
169
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine (87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol or up to 85% Ethanol for Flex Fuel (E-85) Engine)
5.7L Engine (89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol)
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
5.7L Engine – without Severe Duty II Cooling System (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
5.7L Engine – with Severe Duty II Cooling System (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
170
U.S.
Metric
18.5 Gallons
18.5 Gallons
70 Liters
70 Liters
6 Quarts
7 Quarts
5.6 Liters
6.6 Liters
10 Quarts
9.5 Liters
14.5 Quarts
13.9 Liters
15 Quarts
14.3 Liters
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85)
Engine
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix Ultra. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
87 Octane, Up to 85% Ethanol.
89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” cool-
ant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products,
as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
171
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission — 8-Speed Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Front Axle – AWD (If Equipped)
Rear Axle
Transfer Case – AWD (If Equipped)
MOPAR ACCESSORIES
Authentic Accessories By Mopar
In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain far
more than expressive style, premium protection, or
extreme entertainment, you also benefit from enhancing your vehicle with accessories that have
been thoroughly tested and factory-approved.
EXTERIOR:
• Molded Splash Guards
• Vehicle Cover
• Graphics Packages
172
Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct
fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is
acceptable.
We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5).
We recommend you use Mopar OD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
We recommend you use Mopar Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 44–40.
The following highlights just some of the many
Authentic Chrysler Accessories by Mopar featuring
a fit, finish, and functionality specifically for your
Chrysler 300.
• Custom Wheels
• Air Deflectors
• Engine Covers
• Removable Roof Rack
• Bike, Ski, Cargo, and Water Sports Carriers
• Deck Lid Spoiler
INTERIOR:
• All Weather Mats
• Premium Carpet Floor Mats
• Bright Pedal Kit
• Premium Carpet Cargo Mat
• Katzkin Leather Seats
• Door Sill Guards
ELECTRONICS:
• Kicker Speakers
• Electronic Vehicle Tracking System (EVTS)
• Back Up Camera
• Rear Park Assist
• Mopar Wi-Fi
• Wireless Charging
• Remote Start
PERFORMANCE:
• Cold Air Intake
• Mopar Performance Packages (Stage Kits)
• Big Break Kits
• Strut Tower Brace, Front & Rear
• Performance Suspension
• Performance Pad & Rotors
• Catback Exhaust
• Anti-Sway Bars
For the full line of Authentic Chrysler Accessories
by Mopar, visit your local dealership or online at
mopar.com for U.S. residents and mopar.ca for Canadian residents.
NOTE:
• All parts are subject to availability.
• Kicker is a registered trademark of Stillwater Designs and Audio, Inc.
173
174
MULTIMEDIA
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV
WITH 8.4-INCH DISPLAY . . . . . . .178
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance . . . . . .178
Drag & Drop Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Android Auto — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .181
Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped . . .185
UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . .187
TIPS CONTROLS AND
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . .189
Steering Wheel Audio Controls.
Reception Conditions . . . . . .
Care And Maintenance . . . . .
Anti-Theft Protection . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.189
.189
.189
.189
SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped
(Available on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
With 8.4–inch Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
SiriusXM Guardian Activation . . . . . . . . .191
Download The Uconnect App . . . . . . . . .191
Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
With 8.4-inch Display). . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian
Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Built-In Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features . . . . .195
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . .197
NAVIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . .200
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt
Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding Points Of Interest. . . . . . . . .
Finding A Place By Spelling The Name .
One-Step Voice Destination Entry . . . .
Setting Your Home Location . . . . . . .
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding A Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Taking A Detour . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NAV With
8.4–inch Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV With
8.4–inch Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.200
.202
.202
.202
.202
.202
.204
.204
. . .204
. . .204
UCONNECT PHONE . . . . . . . . . .205
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth
Hands Free Calling). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your
Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System . . . .206
Common Phone Commands (Examples) . . .209
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone
During Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset
And Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Voice Command Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Changing The Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Using Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Incoming Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Helpful Tips And Common Questions
To Improve Bluetooth Performance With
Your Uconnect System . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Introducing Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Basic Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
175
MULTIMEDIA
Radio . . . . . . . . . .
Media . . . . . . . . .
Phone . . . . . . . . .
Voice Text Reply . . . .
Climate. . . . . . . . .
Navigation (4C NAV).
176
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.213
.213
.214
.214
.215
.215
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV)— If
Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Register (4C/4C NAV) . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV)
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV) . . . . . . . . .
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.216
.216
.216
.217
.217
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . .217
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Android Auto — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .218
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .219
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may
be equipped with both wired and wireless networks.
These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems
and features in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless
communications. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other
devices, your vehicle may require software updates
to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most
recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems
are breached. It may be possible that vehicle
systems, including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or
CD) into your vehicle if it came from a trusted
source. Media of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed
in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility
for vehicle systems to be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
authorized dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle
owners should:
– Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/
support/software-update.html to learn
about available Uconnect software updates.
– Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer
to “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” in your Owner’s Manual.
177
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV
WITH 8.4-INCH DISPLAY
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance
CAUTION!
• If these features are not available, uncheck the
Sync Time box.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen,
doing so can result in damage to the screen.
• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out of the
Clock Setting screen.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for
your vehicle.
Setting The Time
• Model 4C NAV synchronizes time automatically
via GPS, so it should not require any time adjustment. If you do need to set the time manually,
follow the instructions below for Model 4C NAV.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio Screen
• For Model 4C, turn the unit on, and then press the
time display at the top of the screen. Press “Yes.”
WARNING!
• If the time is not displayed at the top of the screen,
press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen. In
the Settings screen, press the “Clock” button on
the touchscreen, then check or uncheck this option.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all
risks related to the use of the Uconnect features,
SiriusXM Guardian services, and applications in
this vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and
SiriusXM Guardian services when it is safe to do
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
178
• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and Set
Time Minutes to adjust the time.
Background Themes
• Screen background themes are selectable from a
pre-loaded list of themes. If you’d like to set a
theme, follow the instructions below.
• Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen
and select the display menu.
• Then press “Set Theme” button on the touchscreen and select a theme.
Audio Settings
• Press the “Audio” button on the touchscreen to
activate the Audio settings screen to adjust
Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and Speed Adjusted
Volume.
• You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the
“X” located at the top right.
Balance/Fade
Drag & Drop Menu Bar
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the touchscreen to Balance audio between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front
speakers.
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily changed for your convenience.
Simply follow these steps:
• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or “Right” buttons on the touchscreen or press and drag the
Speaker Icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to
replace an existing shortcut in the main menu
bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged down
onto the main menu bar, will now be an active
App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to
activate the Equalizer screen.
• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen, or
press and drag over the level bar for each of the
equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of the Bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch
Display Main Menu
1. Press the “Apps
screen.
” button to open the App
• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the
touchscreen to activate the Speed Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by pressing the volume level indicator. This
alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation to vehicle speed.
179
MULTIMEDIA
Radio
Uconnect 4C NAV Radio
1 — Radio Station Presets
2 — Toggle Between Presets
3 — Status Bar
4 — View Small Navigation Map
5 — HD Radio
6 — Main Category Bar
180
7 — Audio Settings
8 — Seek Up
9 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station
10 — Seek Down
11 — Browse And Manage Presets
12 — Radio Bands
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all
risks related to the use of the Uconnect features,
SiriusXM Guardian services, and applications in
this vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and
SiriusXM Guardian services when it is safe to do
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• To access the Radio mode, press the “Radio” button on the touchscreen.
Selecting Radio Stations
• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or SXM)
button on the touchscreen.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on the
touchscreen for less than two seconds to seek
through radio stations.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds to bypass stations without stopping. The radio will stop at the
next listenable station once the arrow button on
the touchscreen is released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing the
“Tune” button on the screen, and entering the
desired station number.
Store Radio Presets Manually
Your radio can store 36 total preset stations, 12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They are shown
at the top of your radio screen. To see the 12 preset
stations per band, press the arrow button on the
touchscreen at the top right of the screen to toggle
between the two sets of six presets.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the steps
below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered button on
the touchscreen for more than two seconds or
until you hear a confirmation beep.
HD Radio — If Equipped
• HD Radio (available on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV)
operates similar to conventional radio except it
allows broadcasters to transmit a high-quality digital signal.
• With an HD radio receiver, the listener is provided
with a clear sound that enhances the listening experience. HD radio can also transmit data such as
song title or artist.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto
features may or may not be available in every region
and/or language.
Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect system,
and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or higher, powered
smartphone with a data plan, that allows you to
project your smartphone and a number of its apps
onto the touchscreen radio display. Android Auto
automatically brings you useful information, and
organizes it into simple cards that appear just when
they are needed. Android Auto can be used with
Google's best-in-class speech technology, the
steering wheel controls, the knobs and buttons on
your radio faceplate, and the radio display’s touchscreen to control many of your apps.
181
MULTIMEDIA
Once Android Auto is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
To use Android Auto follow these steps:
1. Download the Android Auto app from the
Google Play store on your Android-powered
smartphone.
• Google Maps for navigation
• Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. for
music
2. Connect your Android powered smartphone to
one of the media USB ports in your vehicle. If
you have not downloaded the Android Auto app
to your smartphone before plugging in the device for the first time, the app begins to
download.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable
that came with your phone, as aftermarket
cables may not work.
Your phone may ask you to approve the use of
the Android Auto app before use.
182
• Handsfree Calling, and Texting for communication
• Hundred of compatible apps, and many more!
Android Auto
3. Once Android Auto has made a connection
through USB, Android Auto will also connect via
Bluetooth. The system displays the Android
Auto home screen. Android Auto automatically
launches, but if it does not, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement for the procedure
to enable the feature “AutoShow.” You can also
launch it by pressing Android Auto located in
the “Apps” menu. If you use Android Auto frequently you can move the app to the menu bar at
the bottom of the touchscreen. Press the “Apps”
button and locate the Android Auto app; then
drag the selected App to replace an existing
shortcut in the main menu bar.
NOTE:
To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an area
with cellular coverage. Android Auto may use cellular data and your cellular coverage is shown in the
upper right corner of the radio screen.
NOTE:
If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed, the
built-in Uconnect VR prompts you and any spoken
navigation command launches the built-in
Uconnect navigation system.
While using Android Auto, Google Maps provides
voice-guided:
• Navigation
• Live traffic information
Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage
• Lane guidance
NOTE:
If you are using the built-in Uconnect navigation
system, and you try and start a new route using
Android Auto, via voice or any other method, a
pop-up appears asking if you would like to switch
from Uconnect navigation to smartphone navigation. A pop-up also appears, asking if you’d like to
switch, if Android Auto is currently in use and you
attempt to launch a built-in Uconnect route. Selecting “Yes” switches the navigation type to the newly
used method of navigation and a route is planned
for the new destination. If “No” is selected the navigation type remains unchanged.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download app
on Google Play. Android, Android Auto and
Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
For further information, refer to
www.android.com/auto/ (U.S. Residents) or
https://www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/
(Canadian Residents).
Maps
For further information on the navigation function,
please refer to https://support.google.com/android
or https://support.google.com/androidauto/.
Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel
or tap the microphone icon to ask Google to take
you to a desired destination by voice. You can also
touch the Navigation icon in Android Auto to access Google Maps.
Google Maps
183
MULTIMEDIA
Music
Android Auto allows you to access and stream your
favorite music with apps like Google Play Music,
iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your smartphone’s
data plan, you can stream endless music on the
road.
NOTE:
For music apps, playlists, and stations to work with
Android Auto, they must be set up on your smartphone before using Android Auto.
NOTE:
To see the metadata for the music playing through
Android Auto, select the Uconnect System’s media
screen.
For further information refer to
https://support.google.com/androidauto.
Communication
With Android Auto connected, press and hold the
VR button on the steering wheel to activate voice
recognition specific to the Android Auto. This will
allow you to send and reply to text messages, have
incoming text messages read out loud, and place
and receive hands-free calls.
Android Auto Music
Android Auto Contact
184
Android Auto Phone
Apps
The Android Auto App will display all the compatible apps that are available to use with Android
Auto, every time it is launched. You must have the
compatible app downloaded, and you must be
signed in to the app for it to work with Android
Auto. Refer to g.co/androidauto to see the latest list
of available apps for Android Auto.
Apple CarPlay Integration —
If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay
features may or may not be available in every region
and/or language.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay, the
smarter, more secure way to use your iPhone in the
car, and stay focused on the road. Use your
Uconnect Touchscreen display, the vehicle's knobs
and controls, and your voice with Siri to get access
to Apple Music, Maps, Messages, and more.
2. Once the device is connected, the system displays the CarPlay home screen. Apple CarPlay
automatically launches, but if not, refer to the
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for the
procedure to enable the feature “AutoShow.”
You can also launch it by pressing the CarPlay
icon located in the “Apps” menu. If you use
Apple CarPlay frequently you can move the app
to the menu bar at the bottom of the touchscreen. Press the “Apps” button and locate the
CarPlay app; then drag and drop the selected
App to replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar.
Once CarPlay is up and running on your Uconnect
system, the following features can be utilized using
your iPhone’s data plan:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
NOTE:
To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is turned
on, and that you are in an area with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular coverage is shown on the
left side of the radio screen.
To use CarPlay, make sure you are using iPhone 5 or
later, have Siri enabled in Settings, that your iPhone
is unlocked for the very first connection only, and
then use the following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media USB
ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning
cable that came with your phone, as aftermarket
cables may not work.
CarPlay
CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage
185
MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for phone
compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user
interface is a product of Apple®. Apple CarPlay is a
trademark of Apple Inc. iPhone is a trademark of
Apple Inc., registered in the US and other countries. Apple terms of use and privacy statements
apply.
Music
Maps
CarPlay allows you to access all your artists, playlists, and music from iTunes. Using your iPhone’s
data plan, you can also use select third party audio
apps including music, news, sports, podcasts and
more.
To use your Apple Maps for navigation on your
Uconnect system, launch CarPlay, and push and
hold the VR button on the steering wheel to use Siri
to set your desired destination. Alternatively,
choose a Nearby destination by pressing Destinations and selecting a category, by launching Siri
from the destinations page, or even by typing in a
destination.
Phone
With CarPlay, press and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel to activate a Siri voice recognition
session. You can also press and hold the Home
button within CarPlay to start talking to Siri. This
allows you to make calls or listen to voice mail as you
normally would using Siri on your iPhone.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the
steering wheel launches a built-in VR session, not a
Siri session, and it will not function with CarPlay.
Apple Music
Messages
Just like your iPhone, CarPlay allows you to use Siri
to send or reply to text messages. Since everything
is done by voice, Siri can also read incoming text
messages so you don’t have to.
186
Maps
NOTE:
• If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed,
the built-in Uconnect VR prompts you and any
navigation command said launches the built-in
Uconnect navigation system.
• If you are using the built-in Uconnect navigation
system, and you try and start a new route using
CarPlay, via voice or any other method, a pop-up
appears asking if you would like to switch from
Uconnect navigation to iPhone navigation. A
pop-up also appears, asking if you’d like to switch,
if CarPlay navigation is currently in use and you
attempt to launch a built-in Uconnect route. Selecting “Yes” switches the navigation type to the
newly used method of navigation and a route will
be planned for the new destination. If “No” is
selected the navigation type remains unchanged.
Apps
UCONNECT SETTINGS
To use an app that is compatible with CarPlay, you
must have the compatible app already downloaded
to your iPhone and you must also be signed in.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ (U.S.
Residents)
or
https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/ (Canadian
Residents) to see the latest list of available apps for
CarPlay.
The Uconnect system allows you to access Customer Programmable feature settings such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort,
Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth,
SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal
Data and System Information through buttons on
the touchscreen.
Navigation Pop-Up
187
MULTIMEDIA
• Press the “Controls” button located near the bottom of the touchscreen, then press the “Settings”
button on the touchscreen to access the Settings
screen. When making a selection, scroll up or
down until the preferred setting is highlighted,
then press and release the preferred setting until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected.
The following feature settings are available:
• Language
• Display
• Units
• Voice
• Clock
• Camera
• Safety & Driving Assistance
• Mirrors & Wipers
• Lights
• Doors & Locks
• Auto-On Comfort
• Engine Off Options
• Audio
• Phone/Bluetooth
• SiriusXM Setup
• Reset Settings
• System Information
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” found within “Multimedia” located in your Owner's Manual for further information.
188
TIPS CONTROLS
AND GENERAL
INFORMATION
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
The steering wheel audio controls are located on
the rear surface of the steering wheel.
Right Switch
Anti-Theft Protection
• Push the up or down switch to increase or decrease
the volume.
The system is equipped with an anti-theft protection system based on the exchange of information
with the electronic control unit (Body Computer)
on the vehicle.
• Push the center button to switch between AM,
FM, SXM, AUX/USB, or Bluetooth mode.
Reception Conditions
Reception conditions change constantly while driving. Reception may be interfered with by the presence of mountains, buildings or bridges, especially
when you are far away from the broadcaster.
The volume may be increased when receiving traffic alerts and news.
Care And Maintenance
This guarantees maximum safety and prevents the
secret code from being entered after the power
supply has been disconnected.
If the check has a positive outcome, the system will
start to operate, whereas if the comparison codes
are not the same or if the electronic control unit
(Body Computer) is replaced, the system will ask
the user to enter the secret code. See an authorized
dealer for further information.
Observe the following precautions to ensure the
system is fully operational:
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
Left Switch
• Push the switch up or down to search for the next
listenable station.
• Push the button in the center to select the next
preset station.
• The display lens should not come into contact with
pointed or rigid objects which could damage its
surface; use a soft, dry anti-static cloth to clean
and do not press.
• Never use alcohol, gas and derivatives to clean the
display lens.
• Prevent any liquid from entering the system: this
could damage it beyond repair.
189
MULTIMEDIA
SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN —
IF EQUIPPED
SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped
(Available on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
With 8.4–inch Display)
• Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start your
vehicle from virtually anywhere, using the
Uconnect App from your device. You can also do
so by logging into your owner site, or by calling
SiriusXM Guardian Care when your vehicle has an
operable network connection. Services can only
be used where coverage is available.
WARNING!
• Receive text or email notifications if your vehicle's
security alarm goes off.
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using GPS technology to help authorities locate your vehicle if it is
stolen.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
1. The ASSIST and SOS Call buttons are located
on your rearview mirror. The ASSIST button is
used for contacting Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, SiriusXM Guardian Care, and
Uconnect Care. The SOS Call button connects
you to a SiriusXM Guardian Care Agent, who
can connect you to emergency services.
SiriusXM Guardian enhances your ownership and
driving experience. When connected to an operable network, you can:
• Place a SOS Call to a SiriusXM Guardian operator
who can connect you to emergency responders.
190
• Get operator assistance using the ASSIST button
on your interior rearview mirror.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
easy-to-use SiriusXM Guardian services.
” button is located in
2. The Uconnect “Apps
the center of the menu bar of the radio touchscreen. This is where you can manage your
Apps.
3. The Uconnect Voice Command and Uconnect
Phone buttons are located on the left side of
your steering wheel. These buttons let you use
your voice to give commands, make phone calls,
send and receive text messages, enter navigation
destinations, and control your radio and media
devices.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included trial
period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian services
starting at the date of vehicle purchase (date based
on vehicle sales notification from your dealer). To
activate the trial, you must first register with
SiriusXM Guardian. After the trial period, if you
wish to continue your SiriusXM Guardian services
you can choose to purchase a subscription.
NOTE:
You can check UconnectPhone.com for system and
device compatibility.
SiriusXM Guardian Activation
For further information:.
To use the Uconnect App:
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in
your vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM
Guardian services.
• U.S. residents visit: www.siriusxm.com/guardian
• Search for and download the Uconnect App from
the store on your compatible iPhone or Android
powered device.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your invehicle touchscreen.
Download The Uconnect App
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of
apps.
• Canadian residents visit:
www.siriusxm.ca/guardian
You’re only a few steps away from using remote
commands and other valuable services.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent who
will activate services in your vehicle, or select
“Enter Email” to activate on the web.
• Log in to the app using the email address and
password you created when you activated the services.
• Press the “Remote” button on the bottom menu
bar of the app to Lock/Unlock, Remote Start (if
equipped), and activate your horn and lights remotely.
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom menu
bar of the app to bring up a map to locate your
vehicle or send a location to your vehicle’s navigation system.
Why sign up for SiriusXM Guardian? Here are
just a few examples of things you’ll be able to do:
• Press the menu button (three horizontal lines) in
the upper left corner of the app to access settings
and support information.
• Know that help, if you need it, is only a button press
away with Assist.
• Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from hundreds
of miles away.
• Find your vehicle, no matter where you parked,
using the convenient Vehicle Finder function.
Mobile App
• Use Send & Go to send a navigation route from
your mobile phone to your vehicle’s navigation
system.
191
MULTIMEDIA
Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect
4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display)
Subscriptions can be purchased online by logging
into your owner account. If you need help push the
ASSIST button on the rearview mirror, then select
SiriusXM Guardian Care or:
• U.S. residents dial:1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents dial:1-877-324-9091
Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian
Account
Selling Your Vehicle
When you sell your vehicle, we recommend that
you remove your SiriusXM Guardian Account information from the vehicle. You can do this by
pressing the ASSIST button in your vehicle and
selecting SiriusXM Guardian, or call:
• U.S. residents:1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents:1-877-324-9091
192
Built-In Features
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all
risks related to the use of the Uconnect features,
SiriusXM Guardian services, and applications in
this vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and
SiriusXM Guardian services when it is safe to do
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
• ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention
to the road. Some features are limited while
the vehicle is in motion. Some services, including SOS, will NOT work without a subscription and an operable network connection.
• Ignoring the rearview mirror light could mean
you may not have SOS Call service if needed.
If the rearview mirror light is illuminated, have
an authorized dealer service the SOS Call
system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instru-
WARNING!
ment panel if a malfunction is detected in any
part of the airbag system. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not
be working properly and the SOS Call system
may not send a signal to a SOS Call operator if
an air bag is deployed. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service your vehicle immediately.
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
contact from a SOS Call operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and
move to a safe location.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle’s
electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can
cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
WARNING!
• IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), the Uconnect features, apps, and
SiriusXM Guardian services, among others,
will not operate.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
1. ASSIST Call (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped —
The rearview mirror contains an ASSIST button,
allowing you to speak to a call center agent for
support:
Assist And SOS
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
• Roadside Assistance Call — If you get a flat
tire, or need a tow, you’ll be connected to
someone who can help anytime. Additional
fees may apply. Additional information in this
section.
• Uconnect Care — In vehicle support for
Uconnect Apps and Features.
• SiriusXM Guardian Care — In vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian services.
• Vehicle Care — Total support for your FCA
US LLC vehicle.
NOTE:
In order to provide SiriusXM Guardian Services to
you, we may record and monitor your conversations
with Roadside Assistance, Uconnect Care,
SiriusXM Guardian Care, or Vehicle Care, whether
such conversations are initiated through the
SiriusXM Guardian services in your vehicle, your
device, or via a landline device, and may share information obtained through such recording and monitoring in accordance with regulatory requirements.
You acknowledge, agree, and consent to any recording, monitoring or sharing of information obtained through any such call recordings.
2. Emergency SOS Call (If Equipped) — The
rearview mirror contains a SOS Call button that,
when pressed, may place a call from your vehicle
to a SiriusXM Guardian Care operator, who can
connect you to emergency service operators, to
request help from local police, fire or ambulance
personnel. If this button is accidentally pressed,
you will have ten seconds to stop the call. To
cancel, press the SOS Call button again or press
the “Cancel” button shown on the touchscreen.
After ten seconds has passed, the SOS call will
be placed and only the SOS Call operator can
cancel it. The LED light on the rearview mirror
will turn green once a connection to a SOS Call
193
MULTIMEDIA
operator has been made. The green LED light
will turn off once the SOS Call is terminated.
Have an authorized dealer service the vehicle if
the rearview mirror light is continuously red. On
equipped vehicles, this feature requires a functioning electrical system, a subscription, and an
operable network connection. If a connection is
made between a SOS Call operator and your
vehicle, you understand and agree that SOS
Call operators will stay on the line, even after
you connect with emergency services. The
Emergency services operator may, like any
other emergency call, record conversations
and sounds in and near your vehicle upon
connection.
3. Theft Alarm Notification — If Equipped —
The Theft Alarm Notification feature notifies
you via email or text (SMS) message when the
vehicle’s factory-installed security alarm system
has been triggered. There are a number of reasons why your alarm may have been triggered,
one of which could be that your vehicle was
stolen. If so, please see the details of the Stolen
Vehicle Assistance service below. When activated, Theft Alarm Notification is automatically
194
set to send you an email at the email address you
provide should the alarm go off. You may also
opt to have a text message sent to your device.
4. Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If your vehicle is
stolen, contact local law enforcement immediately to file a stolen vehicle report. Once this
report has been filed, SiriusXM Guardian Care
can help locate your vehicle. The SiriusXM
Guardian Care agent will ask for the stolen vehicle report number issued by local law enforcement. As long as your vehicle has a SiriusXM
Guardian subscription and an operable network
connection, the agent may be able to locate the
stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to
help recover it. Your vehicle must have an operable network connection and must be registered
with SiriusXM Guardian with an active subscription that includes the applicable feature.
5. 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped — Allows you
and your passengers to connect their portable
devices to the built-in 4G Wi-Fi capabilities of
your Uconnect system. Purchasing 4G Wi-Fi
Hotspot requires the use of an Internet-enabled
portable device.
NOTE:
Uconnect offers a complimentary 3–month trial
period that includes 1GB of total data. The trial
can be activated any time within the first year of
new vehicle ownership.
a. To start, the Enable Wi-Fi Hotspot box
should be un-checked.
b. Select the Wi-Fi Hotspot Setup option
from the toushcreeen to locate your
Hotspot Name and Password. Make note of
this information.
c. Tap the Back Arrow to return to the main
Wi-Fi Hotspot page, then check the box to
Enable Wi-Fi Hotspot.
d. From your portable device Wi-Fi settings
menu, select the Hotspot Name from the
list of available networks and enter the provided Password.
e. Open the web browser on your portable
device and enter the following web address:
https://myvehicle.att.com/#/login.
f. Create a myVehicle account or log in to your
existing one.
g. Select and purchase the desired subscription option. The Wi-Fi Hotspot will activate
after a few minutes.
For additional assistance, call AT&T Customer
Care at: 866-595-1330.
NOTE:
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
for any of the in vehicle SiriusXM Guardian services
to operate.
SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features
If you own a compatible iPhone or Android powered device, the Uconnect App allows you to remotely lock or unlock your doors, start your engine
or activate your horn and lights from virtually anywhere. Your vehicle must be equipped with remote
start, must have a SiriusXM Guardian subscription,
and must have an operable network connection.
Services can only be used where coverage is available. You can download the App from Mopar
Owner Connect or from the App Store (iPhone) or
Google
Play
Store
(Android).
Visit
UconnectPhone.com to determine if your device is
compatible. For Uconnect Phone customer support
and to determine if your device is compatible.
U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or
call 1-877-855-8400.
Canadian residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or
call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
call:1-800-387-9983 (French).
Remote Start (If Equipped) — This feature provides the ability to start the engine on your vehicle,
without the keys and from virtually any distance.
You can send a request to your vehicle in one of two
ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compatible
device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
• After 15 minutes if you have not entered your
vehicle with the key, the engine will shut off
automatically.
• You can also send a command to turn-off an
engine that has been remote started.
• This remote function requires your vehicle to
be equipped with a factory-installed Remote
Start system. To utilize this feature after the
Uconnect App is downloaded, login with
your user name and password.
You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guardian
Security PIN to confirm the request. Press the “remote start” icon on your Uconnect App to remotely
start the vehicle.
You can set-up notifications for your account to
receive an email or text (SMS) message every time
a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect at mopar.com and click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifications.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock — If Equipped — This
feature provides the ability to lock or unlock the
door on your vehicle, without the keys and from
virtually any distance. You can send a request to
your vehicle in one of three ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compatible
device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting SiriusXM Guardian Care on the
phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect App is downloaded, login using your user name and password.
195
MULTIMEDIA
You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guardian
Security PIN to confirm the request. Press the
“closed lock” icon on your Uconnect App to lock
the doors, and press the “open lock” icon to unlock
the driver’s door.
You can set-up notifications for your account to
receive an email or text (SMS) message every time
a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect at mopar.com and click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifications.
Remote Horn And Lights — If Equipped — It’s
easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy
parking area by activating the horn and lights. It may
also help if you need to draw attention to your
vehicle for any reason. You can send a request to
your vehicle in one of three ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compatible
device.
You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guardian
Security PIN to confirm the request. You can set-up
notifications for your account to receive an email or
text (SMS) message every time a command is sent.
Login to Mopar Owner Connect at mopar.com and
click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM Guardian
Notifications.
Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect Mobile
App bottom bar.
The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect Mobile
App allows you to find the location of your vehicle
when you can't remember where it's parked. You
can also sound the alarm and flash the lights to
make finding your vehicle even easier.
To find your vehicle:
1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect Mobile
App bottom bar.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
2. Select the “Vehicle” icon to determine the location of your vehicle.
3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Care on
the phone.
3. Select the “Find Route” button that appears,
once your vehicle is located.
To use this feature after the Uconnect App is downloaded, login using your user name and password.
196
4. Select your preferred Navigation App to route a
path to your vehicle.
The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect Mobile
App allows you to search for a destination on your
mobile device and then send the route to your
vehicle’s Uconnect Navigation system.
To send a navigation route to your vehicle:
2. Either type in the destination you would like to
navigate to, or search through one of the categories provided.
3. Select the destination you want to route to from
the list that appears.
4. Press the “Send To Vehicle” button, and then
confirm the destination by pressing “Yes,” to
send the navigation route to the Uconnect Navigation in your vehicle.
5. Finally, confirm the route inside your vehicle by
pressing the “Go Now” option on the pop-up
that appears on the touchscreen, when the vehicle is started.
AUX/USB/MP3
CONTROL
There are many ways to play music from MP3 players or USB devices through your vehicle's sound
system. Press your Media button on the touchscreen to begin.
Audio Jack (AUX)
• The AUX allows a device to be plugged into the
radio and utilize the vehicle’s sound system, using a
3.5 mm audio cable, to amplify the source and play
through the vehicle speakers.
• Pressing the “AUX” button on the touchscreen will
change the mode to auxiliary device if the audio
jack is connected, allowing the music from your
device to be heard through the vehicle's speakers.
To activate the AUX, plug in the audio jack.
• The functions of the device are controlled using
the device buttons. The volume may be controlled
using the radio or device.
Uconnect Media Hub
1 — USB Port One
2 — Audio/AUX Jack
3 — USB Port Two
USB Port
• Connect your compatible device using a USB
cable into the USB Port. USB Memory sticks with
audio files can also be used. Audio from the device
can be played on the vehicles sound system while
providing metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
information on the radio display.
• When connected, the compatible USB device can
be controlled using the radio or Steering Wheel
Audio Controls to play, skip to the next or previous
track, browse, and list the contents.
• The battery charges when plugged into the USB
port (if supported by the specific device).
• To route the USB cable out of the center console,
use the access cut out.
• To route the audio cable out of the center console,
use the access cut out in the front of the console.
197
MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
When connecting your device for the first time, the
system may take several minutes to read your music, depending on the number of files. For example,
the system will take approximately five minutes for
every 1,000 songs loaded on the device. Also during the reading process, the Shuffle and Browse
functions will be disabled. This process is needed to
ensure the full use of your features and only happens the first time it is connected. After the first
time, the reading process of your device will take
considerably less time unless changes are made or
new songs are added to the playlist.
198
Bluetooth Streaming Audio
• If equipped with Uconnect Voice Command, your
Bluetooth-equipped device may also be able to
stream music to your vehicle's sound system. Your
connected device must be Bluetooth-compatible
and paired with your system (see Uconnect Phone
for pairing instructions). You can access the music
from your connected Bluetooth device by pressing the Bluetooth
button on the touchscreen
while in Media mode.
Media Controls
Media Controls
1 — Repeat Music Track
2 — Music Track And Time
3 — Shuffle Music Tracks
4 — Music Track Information
5 — Show Songs Currently In Queue To Be Played
6 — Browse Music By
7 — Music Source
199
MULTIMEDIA
The controls are accessed by pressing the desired
button on the touchscreen and choosing between
AUX, USB, or Bluetooth.
NOTE:
Uconnect will automatically switch to the appropriate mode when something is first connected or
inserted into the system.
NAVIGATION —
IF EQUIPPED
• The information in the section below is only applicable if you have the Uconnect 4C NAV With
8.4–inch Display system.
Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in the
menu bar to access the Navigation system.
Changing The Navigation Voice
Prompt Volume
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen in
the lower right area of the screen.
2. In the Settings menu, press the “Guidance” button on the touchscreen.
3. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav Volume
by pressing the “+” or “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
200
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Navigation
1 — Search For A Destination In All Categories
2 — Find A Destination
3 — View Map
4 — Navigate To Saved Home Destination
5 — Navigate To Saved Work Destination
6 — Navigation Settings
7 — Emergency
8 — Information
201
MULTIMEDIA
Finding Points Of Interest
One-Step Voice Destination Entry
• From the main Navigation menu, press the
“Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then
press the “Points of Interest” button on the touchscreen.
• Enter a navigation destination without taking your
hands off the wheel.
• Select a category and then a subcategory, if necessary.
• Select your destination and press the “GO!” button on the touchscreen.
Finding A Place By Spelling The
Name
• From the Main Navigation Menu press the
“Where to?” button on the touchscreen, press the
“Points of Interest” button on the touchscreen,
then press the “Spell Name” or “Search All” button
on the touchscreen.
• Enter the name of your destination.
• Press the “List” or “OK” button on the touchscreen.
• Select your destination and press the “GO!” button on the touchscreen.
202
• Just push the Uconnect Voice Command
button on the steering wheel, wait for the beep
and say something like, "Find Address 800
Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills MI."
NOTE:
Using your touchscreens keyboard is not available
while your vehicle is in motion. However, you can
also use Voice Commands to enter an address while
moving. Refer to “Uconnect Voice Recognition
Quick Tips” in this section for further information.
Setting Your Home Location
• To add a Home location, press the “Nav” button
on the touchscreen in the menu bar to access the
Navigation system and the Main Navigation
menu.
• Press the “Home” button on the touchscreen. You
can add a Home location by either selecting “Spell
City,” “Spell Street,” or “Select Country.” Select
County is automatically filled out based on your
state.
• Once you have entered your Home location, select the “Save Home” button located on the lower
left-hand side of your touchscreen.
• To delete a saved Home location (or other saved
locations), so you can save a new Home location,
press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen, and in
the “Where To” screen, press “Edit Where To” and
then press the “Home” button on the touchscreen.
Under the Manage screen press the “Reset Location” button. A confirmation screen will appear
asking if you “Are you sure you want to reset this
location?” Press “Reset” to confirm the deletion.
Set a new Home location by following the previous
instructions.
Home
• A Home location must be saved in the system.
From the Main Navigation menu, press the
“Home” button on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Map
1 — Distance To Next Turn
2 — Next Turn Street
3 — Estimated Time Of Arrival
4 — Zoom In And Out
5 — Your Location On The Map
6 — Navigation Main Menu
7 — Current Street Location
8 — Navigation Routing Options
Your route is marked with a blue line on the map. If
you depart from the original route, your route is
recalculated. A speed limit icon could appear as you
travel on major roadways.
203
MULTIMEDIA
Adding A Stop
• To add a stop you must be navigating a route.
• Press the “Menu” button on the touchscreen to
return to the Main Navigation menu.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen,
then search for the extra stop. When another location has been selected, you can choose to cancel your previous route, add as the first destination
or add as the last destination.
• Press the desired selection and press the “GO!”
button on the touchscreen.
Taking A Detour
• To take a detour you must be navigating a route.
• Press the “Detour” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the route you are currently taking is the only
reasonable option, the device may not calculate a
detour. For more information, see your Uconnect
Owner's Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Traffic Plus
(4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display)
Don't Drive Through Traffic. Drive Around It.
204
Avoid congestion before you reach it. By enhancing
your vehicle's navigation system with the ability to
see detailed traffic information, you can pinpoint
traffic incidents, determine average traffic speed
and estimate travel time along your route. Since the
service is integrated with a vehicle's navigation system, SiriusXM Traffic Plus can help drivers pick the
fastest route based on traffic conditions.
• Detailed information on traffic speed, accidents,
construction, and road closings.
• Traffic information from multiple sources, including police and emergency services, cameras and
road sensors.
• Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic information.
• View conditions for points along your route and
beyond. Available in over 130 markets.
SiriusXM Travel Link
(4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display)
In addition to delivering over 130 channels of the
best sports, entertainment, talk, and commercialfree music, SiriusXM offers premium data services
that work in conjunction with compatible navigation
systems. SiriusXM Travel Link brings a wealth of
useful information into your vehicle and right to
your fingertips.
• Fuel Prices — Check local gas and diesel prices in
your area and route to the station of your choice.
• Movie Listings — Check local movie theatres and
listings in your area and route to the theater of
your choice.
• Sports Scores — In-game and final scores as well
as weekly schedules.
• Weather — Check variety of local and national
weather information from radar maps to current
and 5-day forecast.
SiriusXM Travel Link feature is completely integrated into your vehicle. A few minutes after you
start your vehicle, Travel Link information arrives
and updates in the background. You can access the
information whenever you like, with no waiting.
To access SiriusXM Travel Link, press “Apps” button on the touchscreen, then press the “SiriusXM
Travel Link” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription, sold
separately after the trial subscription included with
your vehicle purchase.
UCONNECT PHONE
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling)
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone Menu
1 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength
3 — Do Not Disturb
4 — Reply with Text Message
5 — Current Phone Contact’s Name
6 — Conference Call*
7 — Phone Pairing
8 — Text Messaging Menu**
9 — Direct Dial Pad
10 — Contact Menu
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Favorite Contacts
13 — Mute Microphone
14 — Decline Incoming Call
15 — Answer/Redial/Hold
16 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
17 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
* — Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones
(requires Bluetooth MAP profile)
205
MULTIMEDIA
The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to place
and receive hands-free mobile phone calls. Drivers
can also place mobile phone calls using their voice
or by using the buttons on the touchscreen (see
Voice Command section).
The hands-free calling feature is made possible
through Bluetooth technology — the global standard that enables different electronic devices to
connect to each other wirelessly.
If the Uconnect Phone Button
exists on your
steering wheel, you then have the Uconnect Phone
features.
NOTE:
• The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile,
Version 1.0 or higher.
• Most mobile phones/devices are compatible with
the Uconnect system, however some mobile
phones/devices may not be equipped with all of
the required features to utilize all of the Uconnect
system features.
For Uconnect Customer Care:
Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio
• U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com or
call 1-877-855-8400.
Uconnect 4C, 4C NAV:
• Canadian residents visit UconnectPhone.com or
call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French).
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting)
Your Mobile Phone To The Uconnect
System
Mobile phone pairing is the process of establishing
a wireless connection between a cellular phone and
the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
• To use the Uconnect Phone feature, you first must
determine if your mobile phone and software are
compatible with the Uconnect system. Please visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone
compatibility information.
• Mobile phone pairing is not available while the
vehicle is in motion.
• A maximum of ten mobile phones can be paired to
the Uconnect system.
206
Uconnect 4C & 4C NAV
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position.
2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu Bar on the
touchscreen.
3. Select “Pairing.”
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
5. Select “Add device.”
• Uconnect Phone will display an “In progress”
screen while the system is connecting.
Pair Your iPhone:
Complete The iPhone Pairing Procedure:
range and will connect to the Uconnect system
automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio device
can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time.
If “No” is selected, simply select “Uconnect” from
the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth screen,
and the Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth device.
Pair Your Android Device:
Pairing Request
Bluetooth On/Uconnect Device
To search for available devices on your Bluetooth
enabled iPhone:
1. Press the Settings button.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled.
Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin
to search for Bluetooth connections.
3. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect
system, select “Uconnect”.
1. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept
the connection request from Uconnect Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to enter
the PIN number.
Select The iPhone's Priority Level
When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite mobile phone.
Selecting “Yes” will make this mobile phone the
highest priority. This mobile phone will take precedence over other paired mobile phones within
Uconnect Device
To search for available devices on your Bluetooth
enabled Android Device:
1. Push the Menu button.
2. Select Settings.
207
MULTIMEDIA
3. Select Connections.
Complete The Android Pairing Procedure:
4. Turn Bluetooth setting to “On.”
When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite mobile phone.
Selecting “Yes” will make this mobile phone the
highest priority. This mobile phone will take precedence over other paired mobile phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect system
automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio device
can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time.
If “No” is selected, simply select “Uconnect” from
the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth screen,
and the Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth device.
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled.
Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin
to search for Bluetooth connections.
5. Once your mobile phone finds the Uconnect
system, select “Uconnect”.
• You may be prompted by your mobile phone
to download the phonebook, check “Do Not
Ask Again” to automatically download the
phonebook. This is so you can make calls by
saying the name of your contact.
Pairing Request
1. Confirm the passkey shown on the mobile phone
matches the passkey shown on the Uconnect
system then accept the Bluetooth pairing
request.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones require the PIN to be
entered manually, enter the PIN number shown
on the Uconnect screen.
208
Select The Android Mobile Phone's Priority Level
NOTE:
Software updates, either on your phone or
Uconnect system, may interfere with the Bluetooth
connection. If this happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first, make sure to delete the
device from the list of phones on your Uconnect
system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect from the
list of devices in your phone’s Bluetooth settings.
You are now ready to make hands-free calls. Press
the Uconnect “Phone” button
on your steering wheel to begin.
NOTE:
Refer to UconnectPhone.com website for additional information on mobile phone pairing and for
a list of compatible phones.
Common Phone Commands
(Examples)
• “Call John Smith”
• “Call John Smith mobile”
• “Dial 1 248 555 1212”
• “Redial”
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone
During Call
• During a call, press the “Mute” button on the
Phone main screen to mute and unmute the call.
Transfer Ongoing Call Between
Handset And Vehicle
Phonebook
The Uconnect system will automatically sync your
phonebook from your paired phone, if this feature is
supported by your phone. Phonebook contacts are
updated each time that the phone is connected. If
your phone book entries do not appear, check the
settings on your phone. Some phones require you
to enable this feature manually.
• Your phonebook can be browsed on the Uconnect
system touchscreen, but editing can only be done
on your phone. To browse, press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen, then the “Phonebook”
button on the touchscreen.
Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as Favorites for quicker access. Favorites are shown at the
top of the main phone screen.
Voice Command Tips
• Speaking complete names (i.e; Call John Doe vs.
Call John) will result in greater system accuracy.
• If you are listening to available voice command
options, you do not have to listen to the entire list.
When you hear the command that you need, push
button on the steering wheel, wait for
the
the beep and say your command.
Changing The Volume
• Start a dialogue by pushing the VR button
then say a command. For example, "Help".
,
• Use the radio VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Uconnect
system is speaking.
NOTE:
The volume setting for Uconnect is different than
the audio system.
NOTE:
To access help, push the Uconnect VR button
(if active) on the steering wheel and say "help."
Push the Uconnect VR Pickup button
(if
active) or the VR button
(if active) and say
"cancel" to cancel the help session.
• You can “link” commands together for faster results. Say “Call John Doe, mobile,” for example.
• During an on-going call, press the “Transfer” button on the Phone main screen to transfer an ongoing call between handset and vehicle.
209
MULTIMEDIA
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications
from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep
your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For
your convenience, there is a counter display to keep
track of your missed calls and text messages while
you were using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call or both, when declining an incoming
call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
Incoming Text Messages
After pairing your Uconnect system with a
Bluetooth enabled mobile device with the Message
Access Profile (MAP), the Uconnect system can
announce a new incoming text message and read it
to you over the vehicle’s audio system.
NOTE:
Only incoming text messages received during the
current ignition cycle can be viewed/read.
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly.”
To enable incoming text messaging:
• Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
1. Press the settings button on the mobile phone.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call without
being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
• Only the beginning of your custom message will
be seen on the touchscreen.
• Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhones.
210
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.
iPhone
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure Bluetooth is enabled, and the mobile
phone is paired to the Uconnect system.
3. Select
located under DEVICES next to
Uconnect.
Enable iPhone Incoming Text Messages
Android Devices
1. Push the Menu button on the mobile phone.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.
• A pop up will appear asking you to accept a
request for permission to connect to your
messages. Select “Don’t ask again” and press
OK.
NOTE:
All incoming text messages received during the
current ignition cycle will be deleted from the
Uconnect system when the ignition is turned to the
OFF position.
Helpful Tips And Common Questions
To Improve Bluetooth Performance
With Your Uconnect System
Mobile Phone won’t reconnect to system after
pairing:
• Set mobile phone to auto-connect or trusted device in mobile phone Bluetooth settings (Blackberry devices).
• Perform a factory reset on your mobile phone.
Refer to your mobile phone manufacturer or cellular provider for instructions.
Enable Android Device Incoming Text
Messages
• Many mobile phones do not automatically reconnect after being restarted (hard reboot). Your mobile phone can still be connected manually. Close
all applications that may be operating (refer to
mobile phone manufacturer’s instructions), and
follow “Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System”.
Mobile Phone won’t pair to system:
• Perform a hard reset in the mobile phone by removing the battery (if removable — see your mobile phone’s owner manual).
• Delete pairing history in mobile phone and
Uconnect system; usually found in phone’s
Bluetooth connection settings.
• Verify you are selecting “Uconnect” in the discovered Bluetooth devices on your mobile phone.
• If your vehicle system generates a pin code the
default is 0000.
Mobile Phonebook didn’t download:
• Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the
“phonebook download” request on your mobile
phone.
• Up to 5,000 contact names with four numbers per
contact will transfer to the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
system phonebook.
Can’t make a conference call:
• CDMA (Code-Division Multiple Access) carriers
do not support conference calling. Refer to your
mobile phone user’s manual for further
information.
211
MULTIMEDIA
Making calls while connected to AUX:
Get Started
• Plugging in your mobile phone to AUX while
connected to Bluetooth will disable Hands-Free
Calling. Do not make calls while your mobile
phone is plugged into the AUX jack.
All you need to control your Uconnect system with
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone
pairing instructions.
UCONNECT
VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your
Uconnect system.
Uconnect 4C NAV
NOTE:
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the
Apps menus, of your touchscreen, you have the
Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 4C system.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger
conversations are examples of noise that may
impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview mirror and aimed at the
driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must
first push either the Voice Recognition (VR) or
Phone button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button
and saying a Voice Command from current
category.
212
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at
any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say
or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR
and say “Help.” The system provides
button
you with a list of commands.
. After the beep, say:
• “Cancel” to stop a current voice session
• “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the
touchscreen.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone
Call, Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio,
Media, or Climate Functions. For 8.4–inch
System Only: Push To Begin Navigation
Function
3 — Push To End Call
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or
SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to
hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite
Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
• “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth
and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is
only available for connected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one
of the following commands and follow the prompts
to switch your media source or choose an artist.
• “Change source to Bluetooth”
• “Change source to AUX”
213
MULTIMEDIA
• “Change source to USB”
• “Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest
Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre
Classical”
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen
to see all of the music on your USB device. Your
Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre information is displayed.
Push the Phone button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
• “Call John Smith”
• “Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts”
• “Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)”
• “Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)”
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the
and say “Call,” then pronounce
Phone button
the name exactly as it appears in your phone book.
When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you
can say “Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is
ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile
phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
214
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect announces incoming text messages.
Push the Phone button
and say “Listen.”
(Must have compatible mobile phone paired to
Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you,
push the Phone button
. After the beep,
say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep,
repeat one of the pre-defined messages and
follow the system prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT
REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in traffic. See you later.
Start
No.
I’ll be late.
without me.
Okay.
Where are you?
I will be
<number>
Are you
Call me.
minutes late.
there yet?
I’ll call you later.
I need
directions.
I’m on my way.
I’m lost.
Can’t talk
right now.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP)
to take advantage of this feature. For details about
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only. To enable this feature
on your Apple iPhone, follow these four simple
steps:
Climate
Navigation (4C NAV)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures
hands-free and keep everyone comfortable while
you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with
climate control.)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save
time and become more productive when you know
exactly how to get to where you want to go.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one
of the following commands:
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the beep, say: “Find address 800
Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
• “Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
• “Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After the beep, say: “Find nearest coffee
shop.”
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the
heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle
4 — Turn On “Show Notifications”
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes
Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display
Navigation
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Climate
215
MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV)—
If Equipped
CAUTION!
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including
SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call will
NOT work without an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to
take advantage of the SiriusXM Guardian services
in the next section of this guide. To register with
SiriusXM Guardian, press the Apps button on the
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV touchscreen to get started.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United
States, Alaska, Hawaii and Canada. Services can
only be used where coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
216
SOS Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
Vehicle Health Reports**
Vehicle Health Alert**
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
Register (4C/4C NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian in
your vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM
Guardian services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your invehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of
apps.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent who
will activate services in your vehicle, or select
“Enter Email” to activate on the web.
• U.S. residents visit: www.siriusxm.com/guardian.
• Canadian
residents
www.siriusxm.ca/guardian.
visit:
Vehicle Health Report/Alert
(4C/4C NAV)
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email report,
which summarizes the performance of your vehicle’s key systems so you can stay on top of your
vehicle’s maintenance needs if you are registered
for SiriusXM Guardian. Your vehicle will also send
you Vehicle Health Alerts when it detects issues
with its key systems that need your attention. For
further information, refer to your owner’s manual.
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote
commands and sending a destination from your
phone to your vehicle.
• Once on the “Remote” screen, you can begin
using Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and activate your horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom menu
bar of the app to bring up a map to locate your
vehicle or send a location to your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle Finder and Send & Go , if
equipped.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one
of the following commands:
• “Show fuel prices”
• “Show 5 - day weather forecast”
• “Show extended weather”
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice
Command.
• Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper left
corner of the app to bring up app settings.
NOTE:
For
further
information
please
visit
DriveUconnect.com
(U.S.
Residents)
or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)
Mobile App
To use the Uconnect Mobile App:
• Once you have registered your SiriusXM Guardian services, download the Uconnect App to your
mobile device. Use your Owner Account login
and password to open the app.
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings
a wealth of information right to your Uconnect 4C
NAV system. (Not available for Uconnect 4 system.)
SiriusXM Travel Link
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages,
select media, place phone calls and much more. Siri
uses your natural language to understand what you
mean and responds back to confirm your requests.
217
MULTIMEDIA
The system is designed to keep your eyes on the
road and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help
you perform useful tasks.
For your convenience, there is a counter display to
keep track of your missed calls and text messages
while you were using Do Not Disturb.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep you
can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get directions, read text messages and many other useful
requests.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call or both, when declining an incoming
call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call without
being interrupted by incoming calls.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Siri
Eyes Free Available
NOTE:
Do Not Disturb
• Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhones.
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications
from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep
your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth MAP.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto
features may or may not be available in every region
and/or language.
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with Android’s best-in-class speech technology
through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your
Android powered smartphone and a number of its
apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect
your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or higher, to one of the
media USB ports, using the factory-provided USB
cable, and press the new Android Auto icon that
replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
begin Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button
on the steering wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon within Android Auto, to activate
Android’s VR, which recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your smartphone’s features:
• Maps
• Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
218
• Additional Apps
Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download app
on Google Play. Android, Android Auto, and
Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data plan
to project your iPhone and a number of its apps
onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your
iPhone 5, or higher, to one of the media USB ports,
using the factory-provided Lightning cable, and
press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple
CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the “Home” button
within Apple CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands to use a list of your
iPhone’s features:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
• Additional Apps
Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for phone
compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user
interface is a product of Apple®. Apple CarPlay is a
trademark of Apple Inc. iPhone is a trademark of
Apple Inc., registered in the US and other countries. Apple terms of use and privacy statements
apply.
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay
features may or may not be available in every region
and/or language.
219
MULTIMEDIA
General Information
Additional Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
© 2018 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call:
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or
call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian services support:
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
220
• U.S. residents visit siriusxm.com/guardian or
call: 1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.ca/guardian
or call: 1-877-324-9091
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . .222
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . .223
FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . .
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . .
In Mexico Contact. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands. . . .
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . .
Service Contract. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.222
.222
.222
.222
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . .224
. . .223
. . .223
221
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
IF YOU NEED
ASSISTANCE
Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information:
In Mexico Contact
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to
be happy with our products and services.
• Owner's name and address
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
• Owner's telephone number (home and office)
Mexico, D. F.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your
vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you
get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the facilities, factorytrained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly
and in a timely manner.
• Authorized dealer name
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA US LLC Customer Center
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 21–8004
P.O. Box 191857
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 247-9753
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
Fax: (787) 782-3345
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be
resolved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to
the general manager or owner of the authorized
dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.
222
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment
at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay
service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial
1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service
operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service
contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service
contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an
Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract
other than the manufacturer's service contract. If
you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service
after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in
facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are
absolutely delighted with the ownership experience.
You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to
resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
that could cause a crash or cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
223
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, an authorized dealer or FCA US
LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
224
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety
defect, you should contact the Customer
Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should
contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle
Defect Investigations and Recalls
at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER
FORMS
• You can purchase a copy of the Owner's Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or Warranty Booklet. United States customers may visit the Chrysler
Contact Us page at www.chrysler.com scroll to the
bottom of the page and select the “Contact Us”
link, then select the “Owner’s Manual and Glove
Compartment Material” from the left menu. You
can also purchase a copy by calling
1-800-247-9753 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143
(Canada).
• Replacement User Guide kits or, if you prefer,
additional printed copies of the Owner's Manual,
Warranty Booklet or Radio Manuals may be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com or by
calling 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143
(Canada). Visa, Master Card, American Express
and Discover orders are accepted.
NOTE:
• The Owner's Manual and User Guide electronic
files are also available on the Chrysler, Jeep, Ram
Truck, Dodge and SRT websites.
• Click on the “For Owners” tab, select “Owner/
Service Manuals”. Then select your desired model
year and vehicle from the drop down lists.
INDEX
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Mopar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 114
On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 114
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Additives, Fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . .83, 143
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . .143
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
If Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . .84
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . .77
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 76, 97
Air Conditioner System . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . .38
Air Pressure
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16, 55
Alarm System
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
All Wheel Drive
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181, 218
Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . .170
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185, 219
Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Arming System
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Audio Jack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . .38
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 172
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 172
Autostick
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . .47
AWD
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 172
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 172
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
B-Pillar Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Brake Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 172
225
INDEX
Brake System
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 172
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . .104
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 124
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . .97
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . .96
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . .94
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt . . .92
Infant And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .86
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . .89
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . .87
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
226
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Cooling System
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . .170, 171
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . .109
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . .187
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Deck Lid
Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . .33
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . .60
Dimmer Switch
Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Disable Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210, 218
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Door Ajar Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Drag And Drop Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) .126
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . .110
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . .54
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . .140
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . .124
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132, 151
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136, 137
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149, 150
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . .104
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149, 150
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . .149
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136, 137
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170, 171
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . .83, 143
Ethanol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Exhaust Gas Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29, 99
Filters
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 59, 99
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 172
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Fluids And Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Fog Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Fold-Flat Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Folding Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Front And Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . .115
Fuel
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Fuel, Flexible. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . .44
Gauges
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Hands-Free Phone
Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . .30
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 25
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 25
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
High Beam/Low Beam Select
(Dimmer) Switch . . . . . . . .
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)
Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood Release. . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.30
.44
.42
.42
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Instrument Cluster Display
Information Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . .33
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
In Vehicle Help
Vehicle User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 151
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136, 137
Key Fob
Arm The System . . . . . .
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . .
Passive Entry . . . . . . . .
Passive Entry Programming .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.16
.17
.17
.17
.12
227
INDEX
Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . . . . . . .32
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 124
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 76, 97
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . .30
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . .54
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . .124
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . .31
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . .30
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
228
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . .55
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 59
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . .56, 64
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 59, 99
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 59
Loading Vehicle
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Lug Nuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . .55
Manual Park Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) . . . . . . . .20
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . .64
Mopar Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . .104
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . .171
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Onboard Diagnostic System. . . . . . . . . . .60
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . .224
Paddle Shifters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Paddle Shift Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
ParkSense
Front And Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Personalized Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Phone
Pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) . . . . . . . .205
Phone (Uconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . .154
Power
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . .128
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . .47
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . .27
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . .74
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Radio
Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . .13, 16, 19
Radio Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Radio Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . .33
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Rear Seats, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Rear Wheel Drive
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Restraints, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 25
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . .140
RWD
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .97
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . .99
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . .75
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 97
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . .73
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . .73
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . .75
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 70, 72
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . .72
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . .72
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 22
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
229
INDEX
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 25
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 24
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16, 55
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . .171
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Service Contract. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .105, 106
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 59, 99
Siri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Sirius Satellite Radio
Traffic & Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Sirius Travel Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
SiriusXM Guardian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
In Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Maintaining Your Account . . . . . . . . . .192
230
Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Remote Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Renewing Subscriptions . . . . . . . . . . .192
Send & Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Vehicle Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Spare Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163, 164
Spark Plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 111
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) . . . . . . . . . .112
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Distance Setting (ACC Only) . . . . . . . .114
Mode Setting (ACC Only) . . . . . . . . .114
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . .109, 110
Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Steering Wheel Audio Controls. . . . . . . . .189
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag . . . .78
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . .27
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . .38
Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Time Delay
Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . .154
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 158, 163, 165
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . .132, 133, 136, 151
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
General Information . . . . . . . . . .158, 163
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Inflation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 151
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .154, 155
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . .56, 64
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136, 161
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151, 158
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Spare Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163, 164
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome. . . . . .121
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Transfer Case
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 172
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171, 172
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Trunk Release Remote Control. . . . . . . . . .43
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 59
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch Display. .178
Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone)
Making A Phone Call . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Receiving A Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Uconnect Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . .17
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . .17
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . .165
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . .72
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . .168
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Vehicle User Guide
In Vehicle Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209, 212
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . .209, 212
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care . . . . . . . . . .164
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim . . . . . . . . . .164
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Windshield Washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 33
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Wipers, Intermittent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
231
232
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in
a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that
may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation
or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous
and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving.
It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly acquainted with your new Chrysler brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for
common questions. However, it is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions, maintenance procedures and important safety messages, please consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect manuals found on the website on the back cover and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Chrysler brand dealer.
D R I V I N G A N D A L C O H O L : Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired
I M P O R T A N T: Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and
follow the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend,
or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have
been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
3242132_18d_Chrysler_300_UG_020518.indd 2
2/5/18 2:18 PM
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to
take following an accident, or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler
brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride.
To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).
www.chrysler.com/en/owners (U.S.) provides special offers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries, personalized service records and
more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often.
Download a FREE electronic copy of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, media and warranty booklet by visiting:
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S. residents);
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).
Chrysler.com (U.S.)
Chrysler.ca (Canada)
18LX-926 -AA • 300
FOURTH E DITION • U SER GU IDE
Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and
the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on
the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the
instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
CHRYSLER 300
2018 USER GUIDE
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
3242132_18d_Chrysler_300_UG_020518.indd 1
2/5/18 2:18 PM
Download PDF